Sophos Enterprise Console is a single, automated console that manages and updates Sophos security software on computers running Windows, Mac OS X, Linux and UNIX operating systems.

Enterprise Console enables you to do the following:

■

Protect your network against viruses, Trojans, worms, spyware, malicious websites, and unknown threats, as well as adware and other potentially unwanted applications.

Control which websites users can browse to, further protecting the network against malware, and preventing users from browsing to inappropriate websites.

Control which applications can run on the network.

Manage client firewall protection on endpoint computers.

■

Assess computers for missing patches.

Reduce accidental data loss, such as unintentional transfer of sensitive data, from endpoint computers.

■

Prevent users from using unauthorized external storage devices and wireless connection technologies on endpoint computers.

Prevent users from re-configuring, disabling, or uninstalling Sophos security software.

Protect data on endpoint computers against unauthorized access with full disk encryption.

Note: Some of the features above are not included with all licenses. If you want to use them, you might need to change your license. For more information, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/products/complete/comparison.aspx

Help

2 Guide to the Enterprise Console interface

2.1 User interface layout

The Enterprise Console user interface consists of the following areas:

Toolbar

The toolbar contains shortcuts to the most common commands for using and configuring your

Sophos security software.

For more information, see

Toolbar buttons

(page 8).

Dashboard

The Dashboard provides an at-a-glance view of your network's security status.

For more information, see

Dashboard panels (page 10).

Computer list

The computer list is displayed at the bottom right. It has two views:

■

Endpoints view displays the computers in the group that is selected in the Groups pane at the bottom left. For more information, see

Navigating the Endpoints view

(page 12).

■

Update managers view displays the computers where Sophos Update Manager is installed.

For more information, see Navigating the Update managers view

(page 16).

The screenshot below shows the computer list in the Endpoints view.

Sophos Enterprise Console

2.2 Toolbar buttons

The following table describes the toolbar buttons. Some toolbar buttons are available only in specific circumstances. For example, the Protect button to install anti-virus and firewall software is only available if a group of computers is selected in the Groups pane in the Endpoints view.

Toolbar Button

Discover computers

Description

Searches for computers on the network and adds them to the console.

For more information, see

Choose how to discover computers (page 40) and

the other topics in the Setting up Enterprise Console > Finding computers on

the network section.

Create group

View/Edit policy

Creates a new group for computers.

For more information, see

Create a group (page 32).

Opens the policy selected in the Policies pane for editing.

For more information, see

Edit a policy

(page 38).

Help

Toolbar Button

Protect

Endpoints

Update managers

Description

Installs anti-virus and firewall software on the computers selected in the computer list.

For more information, see

Protect computers automatically (page 52).

Switches to the Endpoints view in the computer list.

The Endpoints view displays the computers in the group that is selected in the

Groups pane.

For more information, see

Navigating the Endpoints view (page 12).

Switches to the Update managers view in the computer list.

The Update managers view displays computers where Sophos Update Manager is installed.

For more information, see

Navigating the Update managers view

(page 16).

Reports

Dashboard

Starts Report Manager so that you can generate reports about alerts and events on your network.

For more information, see About reports

(page 205) and the other topics in the

Generating reports section.

Shows or hides the Dashboard.

The Dashboard provides an at-a-glance view of your network's security status.

For more information, see

Dashboard panels

(page 10).

Sophos Mobile Control

When the Sophos Mobile Control URL is configured, this opens the web console for Sophos Mobile Control, a device management solution for mobile devices

(such as smartphones and tablets) that helps you to manage apps and security settings.

For more information, see Configure the Sophos Mobile Control URL (page 49).

Sophos Enterprise Console

2.3 Dashboard panels

The Dashboard contains the following panels:

Dashboard Panel

Computers

Description

Displays the total number of computers on the network and the number of connected, managed, unmanaged and encrypted computers.

To view a list of managed, unmanaged, connected, encrypted, or all computers, click a link in the Computers area.

Updates

Displays the status of update managers.

Computers with alerts

Displays the number and percentage of managed computers with alerts about:

Known and unknown viruses and spyware

Suspicious behavior and files

Adware and other potentially unwanted applications

To view a list of managed computers with outstanding alerts, click the panel title

Computers with alerts.

Computers over event threshold

Displays the number of computers with events over the threshold within the last seven days.

To view a list of computers with device control, data control, controlled application, or firewall events, click a link in the Computers over event

threshold panel.

Note: Depending on your license, some of the event types may not be displayed.

Help

Dashboard Panel

Policies

Protection

Errors

Description

Displays the number and percentage of managed computers with group policy violations or policy comparison errors. It also includes computers that haven't yet responded to the changed policy sent to them from the console.

To view a list of managed computers that differ from policy, click the panel title

Policies.

Displays the number and percentage of managed and connected computers on which Sophos Endpoint Security and Control or Sophos Anti-Virus is out of date or uses unknown detection data.

To view a list of managed connected out-of-date computers, click the panel title

Protection.

Displays the number and percentage of managed computers with outstanding scanning, updating, or firewall errors.

To view a list of managed computers with outstanding Sophos product errors, click the panel title Errors.

2.4 Security status icons

The following table describes the security status icons displayed in the Dashboard and the

Enterprise Console status bar.

Security status icon Description

Normal

The number of affected computers is below the warning level.

Warning

The warning level has been exceeded.

Critical

The critical level has been exceeded.

Dashboard panel health icons

A Dashboard panel health icon is displayed in the upper-right corner of a Dashboard panel. It shows the status of the particular security area represented by the panel.

Sophos Enterprise Console

A Dashboard panel health icon shows the status of a panel icon with the most severe status, that is:

■

A panel health icon changes from Normal to Warning when a warning level is exceeded for at least one icon in the panel.

■

A panel health icon changes from Warning to Critical when a critical level is exceeded for at least one icon in the panel.

The network health icon

The network health icon is displayed on the right side of the Enterprise Console status bar. It shows the overall security status of your network.

The network health icon shows the status of the Dashboard panel with the most severe status, that is:

■

The network's overall health icon changes from Normal to Warning when a warning level is exceeded for at least one icon in the Dashboard.

The network's overall health icon changes from Warning to Critical when a critical level is exceeded for at least one icon in the Dashboard.

When you first install or upgrade Enterprise Console, the Dashboard uses the default warning

and critical levels. To configure your own warning and critical levels, see Configure the Dashboard

(page 56).

You can also set up email alerts to be sent to your chosen recipients when a warning or critical

level has been exceeded for a Dashboard panel. For instructions, see Set up network status email alerts (page 192).

2.5 Navigating the Endpoints view

Computer list

In the Endpoints view, the computer list displays the endpoint computers in the group that is selected in the Groups pane.

This view contains a number of tabs. The Status tab shows whether the computers are protected by on-access scanning, whether they are compliant with their group policies, which features are

enabled, and whether the software is up to date. This tab also shows if there are any alerts. The other tabs give more detailed information on each of these subjects.

You can filter the computer list using the View filter. In the View drop-down list, select which computers you want to see. For example, select Computers with potential problems to display computers with problems.

You can also filter the computer list by the name of a detected item such as malware, potentially

unwanted application, or suspicious file. For more information, see Filter computers by the name of a detected item (page 15).

You can search for computers by computer name, computer description or IP address. For more

information, see Find a computer in Enterprise Console (page 15).

For an explanation of the icons displayed in the computer list, see Computer list icons

(page 13).

You can copy or print data displayed in the computer list. For more information, see

Copy data from the computer list

(page 219) and the other topics in the section Copying or printing data from

Enterprise Console.

Groups pane

In the Groups pane, you create groups and put networked computers in them. You can create groups yourself or you can import Active Directory containers, with or without computers, and use them as Enterprise Console computer groups.

For more information, see

What are groups for?

(page 31) and the other topics in the Setting up

Enterprise Console > Creating and using groups section.

The Unassigned group is for computers that are not yet in a group that you created.

Policies pane

In the Policies pane, you create and configure the policies applied to groups of computers. For more information, see the following:

■

About policies (page 34) and the other topics in the Setting up Enterprise Console > Creating

and using policies section

The Configuring policies section

2.6 Computer list icons

Alerts

Icon

Help

Explanation

A red warning sign displayed in the Alerts and errors column on the Status tab means that a virus, worm, Trojan, spyware, or suspicious behavior has been detected.

Sophos Enterprise Console

Icon Explanation

A yellow warning sign displayed in the Alerts and errors column on the Status tab indicates one of the following problems:

A suspicious file has been detected.

An adware or other potentially unwanted application has been detected.

An error has occurred.

A yellow warning sign displayed in the Policy compliance column indicates that the computer is not using the same policy or policies as other computers in its group.

If there are multiple alerts or errors on a computer, the icon of an alert that has the highest priority will be displayed in the Alerts and errors column. Alert types are listed below in descending order of priority.

1. Virus and spyware alerts

2. Suspicious behavior alerts

3. Suspicious file alerts

4. Adware and PUA alerts

5. Software application errors (for example, installation errors)

If several alerts with the same priority are received from the same computer, the most recent alert will be displayed in the computer list.

Protection disabled or out of date

A gray feature icon in the feature status column on the Status tab means that the feature is disabled. For example, a gray shield in the On-access column means that on-access scanning is inactive.

A clock icon in the Up to date column means that the security software is out of date.

Computer status

Icon Explanation

A computer sign with a green connector means that the computer is managed by

Enterprise Console.

A computer sign with a yellow hourglass means that installation of security software is pending.

A computer sign with a yellow down arrow means that installation of security software is in progress.

Help

Icon Explanation

A gray computer sign means that the computer is not managed by Enterprise Console.

A computer sign with a red cross means that the computer that is usually managed by Enterprise Console is disconnected from the network. (Unmanaged disconnected computers are not shown.)

2.7 Filter computers by the name of a detected item

You can filter the computer list by the name of a detected item such as malware, potentially unwanted application, or suspicious file. You can do so by configuring the filter "Managed computers affected by...". The filter is displayed in the View drop-down list along with the other computer list filters.

To configure the filter:

1. On the Tools menu, click Configure Filters.

2. In the Configure Computer List Filter dialog box, enter the name of a detected item you want to filter by. You can find the names of items detected on your network in:

■

Computer list view, Alert and Error Details tab, Item detected column.

Please note that if a computer has multiple detected items, the Item detected column will display only the latest highest priority item, which may not be the one you filter by.

■

Resolve alerts and errors dialog box. To open the dialog box, select a computer or computers in the computer list or a group of computers in the Groups pane, right-click and click Resolve Alerts and Errors.

Computer details dialog box. To open the dialog box, double-click the affected computer.

Then scroll down to the Outstanding alerts and errors section.

Reports (for example, Alert summary or Alerts and events by item name). To open the

Report Manager, on the Tools menu, click Manage Reports.

You can use wildcards. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters. For example, if you enter "Mal*" and then apply the filter, the computer list view will show computers infected with malware whose name begins with "Mal", such as "Mal/Conficker-A" and

"Mal/Packer".

2.8 Find a computer in Enterprise Console

You can search for a computer or computers in Enterprise Console by:

■

Computer name

■

Computer description

Sophos Enterprise Console

■

IP address

1. To find a computer, do either of the following:

■

Press CTRL+F.

On the Edit menu, click Find a Computer.

Click anywhere in the computer list, right-click, and then click Find a Computer.

2. In the Find dialog box, enter your search criteria.

The Find what field is not case sensitive. Trailing wildcards are implicit.

You can use the wildcards * and ?

For example:

Search criteria

UKlapt

Ukla*

*ukla

Ukl*t

?klap

UKl??t

Search results

Finds any string beginning with “uklapt”, for example, UKlaptop-011,

UKlaptop-155, uklaptop132.

Finds any string beginning with “ukla”. The wildcard is not needed as it is there implicitly; search returns the same results as in the previous example,

UKlaptop-011, UKlaptop-155, uklaptop132.

Finds any string containing “ukla”, for example, UKlaptop-011, 055uklax,

056-Dukla-sales.

Finds any string beginning with “ukl”, containing a “t”, and ending with any character, for example, UKlaptop-011, ukLite55.

Finds any string beginning with any single character followed by “klap” and ending with any character, for example, UKlaptop-011, uklapland33.

Finds any string beginning with “ukl”, followed by two characters, followed by “t”, and ending with any character, for example, UKlaptop-011, uklist101.

2.9 Navigating the Update managers view

Help

Computer list

In the Update managers view, you set up automatic updating of Sophos security software from the Sophos website and view the status and details of your update managers.

The computer list displays the computers where Sophos Update Manager is installed.

Software subscriptions

You use the Software Subscriptions pane to create or edit software subscriptions that specify which versions of endpoint software are downloaded from Sophos for each platform.

Sophos Enterprise Console

3 Getting started with Sophos Enterprise

Console

This is an overview of the tasks you need to perform to protect your network after you have installed Enterprise Console and completed the Download Security Software Wizard. For more information about using Enterprise Console, refer to the other materials and sections mentioned.

We recommend that you refer to the Sophos Enterprise Console policy setup guide for advice on best practices for using and managing Sophos security software. Sophos documentation is published at http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/documentation .

If you haven't completed the Download Security Software Wizard, see

Run the Download

Security Software Wizard

(page 76).

To protect your network, follow these steps:

1. Create groups.

You can create groups yourself, one by one, or you can import Active Directory containers, with or without computers, and use them as Enterprise Console computer groups.

If you want to import Active Directory containers, see Import containers and computers from

Active Directory

(page 40). We recommend that you first import containers from Active Directory without computers, then assign group policies to the groups, and then add computers to the groups, for example, by synchronizing the groups with Active Directory.

For information about creating groups manually, see What are groups for?

(page 31) and other

topics in the subsection Creating and using groups under the Setting up Enterprise Console section.

2. Set up policies.

Enterprise Console has a set of default policies that are essential to keep your network protected. You can use default Updating and Anti-virus and HIPS policies out of the box.

To configure the firewall policy, run the Firewall policy wizard. See

Set up a basic firewall policy

(page 115).

3. Discover computers on the network and add them to the console.

If you have imported containers and computers from Active Directory in step 1, you do not need to do anything. Otherwise, see

Choose how to discover computers

(page 40) and other topics in the subsection Discovering computers on the network under the Setting up Enterprise

Console section.

Help

4. Protect computers.

You can choose between two approaches to protecting your networked computers, depending on which suits you best.

■

Using the Protect Computers Wizard

When you drag a computer from the Unassigned group and drop it onto another group, a

wizard is launched to help you protect the computers. See Protect computers automatically

(page 52) and other topics in the section Protecting computers.

■

Protecting computers automatically during synchronization with Active Directory

If you chose to synchronize with Active Directory, you can also choose to protect your

Windows computers automatically.You can do so in the Synchronize with Active Directory

Wizard or Synchronization properties dialog box. For instructions, see Use synchronization to protect computers automatically (page 47).

5. Check that computers are protected.

When installation is complete, look at the list of computers in the new group again. In the

On-access column, you should see the word Active: this shows that the computer is protected by on-access scanning, and that it is now managed by Enterprise Console. For more information, see

How do I check that my network is protected?

(page 55)

6. Clean up computers.

If a virus, unwanted application, or other issue has been detected on your network, clean up

affected computers as described in Clean up computers now

(page 62).

Additional protection options

By default, Sophos Endpoint Security and Control detects malware (viruses, Trojans, worms, spyware), adware and other potentially unwanted applications, and suspicious behavior. It also blocks access to websites that are known to host malware and scans content downloaded from the internet. You can enable further security and productivity features, as described in the section

Configuring policies.

Encryption options

If your license includes encryption, you can protect your computers against unauthorized access.

Drives can be encrypted transparently and Power-on Authentication provides an additional authentication mechanism before the operating system starts.

Administrative options

You can set up different roles in Enterprise Console, add rights to the roles, and then assign

Windows users and groups to the roles. The System Administrator role that includes the Sophos

Full Administrators Windows group has full rights and does not require setting up. For more

information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

You can split your IT estate into sub-estates and assign Enterprise Console groups of computers to the sub-estates. You can then control access to the sub-estates by assigning Windows users and groups to them. The Default sub-estate contains all Enterprise Console groups, including

the Unassigned group. For more information about sub-estates, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

Sophos Enterprise Console

4 Setting up Enterprise Console

4.1 Managing roles and sub-estates

4.1.1 About roles and sub-estates

Important: If you already use role-based administration, you must have the Role-based

administration right to set up roles and sub-estates. The System Administrator role that includes the Sophos Full Administrators Windows group has full rights and does not require setting up.

For more information, see

What are the preconfigured roles?

(page 21) and What tasks do the rights authorize?

(page 24).

You can set up role-based access to the console by setting up roles, adding rights to the roles, and then assigning Windows users and groups to the roles. For example, a Help Desk engineer can update or clean up computers, but cannot configure policies, which is the responsibility of an

Administrator.

To open Enterprise Console, a user must be a member of the Sophos Console Administrators group and be assigned to at least one Enterprise Console role and one sub-estate. Members of the Sophos Full Administrators group have full access to Enterprise Console.

Note: If you want to allow a user to use a remote or additional Enterprise Console, see How can another user use Enterprise Console?

(page 30)

You can create your own roles or use preconfigured roles.

You can assign a user as many roles as you like, by adding to the roles either the individual user or a Windows group the user belongs to.

If a user does not have rights to perform a certain task within the console, they can still view configuration settings pertaining to that task. A user who is not assigned any role cannot open

Enterprise Console.

You can also restrict the computers and groups that users can perform operations on. You can split your IT estate into sub-estates and assign Enterprise Console groups of computers to the sub-estates. You can then control access to the sub-estates by assigning Windows users and groups to them. The Default sub-estate contains all Enterprise Console groups, including the

Unassigned group.

A user can only see the sub-estate that they are assigned to. If a user has been assigned to more than one sub-estate, they can choose which sub-estate to view, one sub-estate at a time. The sub-estate that is open in Enterprise Console is the active sub-estate. A user cannot edit a policy that is applied outside their active sub-estate.

Help

Figure 1: Roles and sub-estates

4.1.2 What are the preconfigured roles?

There are four preconfigured roles in Enterprise Console:

Role

System Administrator

Administrator

Helpdesk

Guest

Description

A preconfigured role that has full rights to manage Sophos security software on the network and roles in Enterprise Console. The System Administrator role cannot be edited or deleted.

A preconfigured role that has rights to manage Sophos security software on the network, but cannot manage roles in Enterprise Console. The Administrator role can be renamed, edited, or deleted.

A preconfigured role that has remediation rights only, for example, to clean up or update computers. The Helpdesk role can be renamed, edited, or deleted.

A preconfigured role that has read-only access to Enterprise Console. The

Guest role can be renamed, edited, or deleted.

You can edit the Administrator, Helpdesk and Guest roles, or create your own roles as described

in Create a role

(page 22).

Sophos Enterprise Console

4.1.3 Create a role

If you already use role-based administration, you must have the Role-based administration right to perform this task. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

1. On the Tools menu, click Manage Roles and Sub-Estates.

2. In the Manage roles and sub-estates dialog box, on the Manage roles tab, click Create.

The Create role dialog box appears.

3. In the Role name field, enter a name for the role.

4. In the Rights pane, select the right or rights you want to assign to the role and click Add.

5. In the Users and groups pane, click Add.

6. In the Select User or Group dialog box, enter the name of a Windows user or group you want to assign to the role. Click OK.

If necessary, assign more users or groups to the role, as described in steps 5 and 6.

4.1.4 Delete a role

If you already use role-based administration, you must have the Role-based administration right to perform this task. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

1. On the Tools menu, click Manage Roles and Sub-Estates.

2. In the Manage roles and sub-estates dialog box, on the Manage roles tab, select the role you want to delete and click Delete.

Note: The preconfigured System Administrator role cannot be deleted.

4.1.5 Edit a role

If you already use role-based administration, you must have the Role-based administration right to perform this task. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

1. On the Tools menu, click Manage Roles and Sub-Estates.

2. In the Manage roles and sub-estates dialog box, on the Manage roles tab, select the role you want to edit and click Edit.

The Edit role dialog box appears.

3. In the Rights pane, assign rights to the role or remove existing rights as appropriate.

4. In the Users and groups pane, add Windows users or groups to the role or remove existing users or groups as appropriate.

4.1.6 Grant rights to a role

If you already use role-based administration, you must have the Role-based administration right to perform this task. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

1. On the Tools menu, click Manage Roles and Sub-Estates.

Help

2. In the Manage roles and sub-estates dialog box, on the Manage roles tab, select the role you want to add a right to and click Edit.

The Edit role dialog box appears.

3. In the Rights pane, in the Available rights list, select a right and click Add.

4.1.7 Create a sub-estate

If you already use role-based administration, you must have the Role-based administration right to perform this task. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

1. On the Tools menu, click Manage Roles and Sub-Estates.

2. In the Manage roles and sub-estates dialog box, on the Manage sub-estates tab, click

Create.

The Create sub-estate dialog box appears.

3. In the Sub-estate name field, enter a name for the sub-estate.

4. In the Enterprise Console groups pane, select the groups you want to add to the sub-estate.

5. In the Users and groups pane, click Add to add Windows users or groups to the sub-estate.

4.1.8 Change active sub-estate

If you have been assigned to more than one sub-estate, you can choose which sub-estate you want to view when opening Enterprise Console, or you can switch among the sub-estates in

Enterprise Console.

You can only view one sub-estate at a time. When you change your active sub-estate, Enterprise

Console is reloaded with a new sub-estate.

To change active sub-estate:

1. On the Tools menu, click Select Active Sub-Estate.

2. In the Select Active Sub-Estate dialog box, select the sub-estate you want to open and click

OK.

4.1.9 Edit a sub-estate

If you already use role-based administration, you must have the Role-based administration right to perform this task. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

1. On the Tools menu, click Manage Roles and Sub-Estates.

2. In the Manage roles and sub-estates dialog box, on the Manage sub-estates tab, select the sub-estate you want to edit and click Edit.

3. In the Edit sub-estate dialog box, change the name of the sub-estate, change which Enterprise

Console groups are included in the sub-estate, or change which Windows users and groups have access to the sub-estate, as appropriate. Click OK.

Sophos Enterprise Console

4.1.10 Copy a sub-estate

If you already use role-based administration, you must have the Role-based administration right to perform this task. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

1. On the Tools menu, click Manage Roles and Sub-Estates.

2. In the Manage roles and sub-estates dialog box, on the Manage sub-estates tab, select the sub-estate you want to copy and click Copy.

A copy of the sub-estate appears in the list of sub-estates.

3. Select the newly created sub-estate and click Edit. Rename the sub-estate. Change the groups that are included in the sub-estate and/or Windows users and groups that have access to it, if you want to.

4.1.11 Delete a sub-estate

If you already use role-based administration, you must have the Role-based administration right to perform this task. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

1. On the Tools menu, click Manage Roles and Sub-Estates.

2. In the Manage roles and sub-estates dialog box, on the Manage sub-estates tab, select the sub-estate you want to delete and click Delete.

You cannot delete the Default sub-estate.

4.1.12 View user or group roles and sub-estates

To view the roles and sub-estates a Windows user or group has been assigned to:

1. On the Tools menu, click Manage roles and sub-estates.

2. In the Manage roles and sub-estates dialog box, go to the User and Group View tab and click the Select user or group button.

3. In the Select User or Group dialog box, select a user or group whose roles and sub-estates you want to view and click OK.

4.1.13 What tasks do the rights authorize?

Note: Depending on your license, some of the rights may not be applicable.

Right

Auditing

Computer search, protection and groups

Tasks

Enable auditing, disable auditing

Start search, stop search and find domains for Network search, IP range search and Active Directory search

Right

Data control customization

Help

Tasks

Import computers and groups from Active Directory; import groups from Active Directory

Import computers from a file

Delete a computer

Protect a computer

Synchronize a group with Active Directory

Change group synchronization properties

Remove group synchronization

Move a computer

Create a group

Rename a group

Move a group

Delete a group

Assign a policy to a group

Create a data control rule

Edit a data control rule

Copy a data control rule

Delete a data control rule

Exclude files from data control scanning

Create a Content Control List

Edit a Content Control List

Copy a Content Control List

Sophos Enterprise Console

Right Tasks

Data control events

Delete a Content Control List

Display the data control event viewer

Display data control events in computer details

Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS Create an anti-virus and HIPS policy

Duplicate an anti-virus and HIPS policy

Policy setting - application control

Rename an anti-virus and HIPS policy

Edit an anti-virus and HIPS policy

Restore default anti-virus and HIPS settings

Delete an anti-virus and HIPS policy

Add or remove entry from threat master list

Create an application control policy

Duplicate an application control policy

Rename an application control policy

Policy setting - data control

Edit an application control policy

Restore default application control settings

Delete an application control policy

Create a data control policy

Duplicate a data control policy

Rename a data control policy

Edit a data control policy

Restore default data control settings

Delete a data control policy

Help

Right

Policy setting - device control

Policy setting - firewall

Policy setting - patch

Policy setting - tamper protection

Tasks

Create a device control policy

Duplicate a device control policy

Rename a device control policy

Edit a device control policy

Restore default device control settings

Delete a device control policy

Create a firewall policy

Duplicate a firewall policy

Rename a firewall policy

Edit a firewall policy

Restore default firewall settings

Delete a firewall policy

Create a patch policy

Duplicate a patch policy

Rename a patch policy

Edit a patch policy

Restore default patch settings

Delete a patch policy

Create a tamper protection policy

Duplicate a tamper protection policy

Rename a tamper protection policy

Edit a tamper protection policy

Sophos Enterprise Console

Right

Policy setting - updating

Policy setting - web control

Policy setting - full disk encryption

Tasks

Restore default tamper protection settings

Delete a tamper protection policy

Create an updating policy

Duplicate an updating policy

Rename an updating policy

Edit an updating policy

Restore default updating settings

Delete an updating policy

Create a subscription

Edit a subscription

Rename a subscription

Duplicate a subscription

Delete a subscription

Configure update managers

Create a web control policy

Duplicate a web control policy

Rename a web control policy

Edit a web control policy

Reset a default web control policy

Delete a web control policy

Create a full disk encryption policy

Duplicate a full disk encryption policy

Help

Right Tasks

Global encryption settings

Rename a full disk encryption policy

Edit a full disk encryption policy

Restore default full disk encryption settings

Delete a full disk encryption policy

Edit global encryption settings

Back up company certificate

Export key recovery file

Remediation - cleanup Clean up detected items

Acknowledge alerts

Acknowledge errors

Remediation - updating and scanning Update computers now

Run a full system scan of a computer

Make computers comply with the group policy

Make update manager comply with configuration

Instruct update manager to update now

Remediation - encryption recovery

Report configuration

Role-based administration

Recover access to encrypted computers with Challenge/Response

Create, edit, or delete a report

Create a role

Rename a role

Delete a role

Modify the rights of a role

Add a user or group to a role

Sophos Enterprise Console

Right

System configuration

Web events

Tasks

Remove a user or group from a role

Sub-estate management: create a sub-estate; rename a sub-estate; delete a sub-estate; add a sub-estate root group; remove a sub-estate root group; add a user or group to a sub-estate; remove a user or group from a sub-estate

Modify SMTP server settings; test SMTP server settings; modify email alert recipients

Configure dashboard warning and critical levels

Configure reporting: configure database alert purging; set the company name displayed in reports

Configure reporting to Sophos: enable or disable reporting to

Sophos; modify the username; modify the contact email address

Display the web event viewer

Display web events in computer details dialog box

4.1.14 How can another user use Enterprise Console?

Members of the Sophos Full Administrators group have full access to Enterprise Console.

You can allow other users to use Enterprise Console. To open Enterprise Console, a user must be:

■

A member of the Sophos Console Administrators group.

Assigned to at least one Enterprise Console role.

■

Assigned to at least one Enterprise Console sub-estate.

If you want to assign a user to the Sophos Console Administrators group, use Windows tools to add that user to the group.

To assign a user to an Enterprise Console role or sub-estate, on the Tools menu, click Manage

Roles and Sub-Estates. For more information about roles and sub-estates, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

To use a remote or additional Enterprise Console, a user must be:

■

A member of the Sophos Console Administrators group on the server where the Enterprise

Console management server is installed.

Help

■

A member of the Distributed COM Users group on the server where the Enterprise Console management server is installed. (The Distributed COM Users group is located in the Builtin container of the Active Directory Users and Computers tool.)

Assigned to at least one Enterprise Console role.

Assigned to at least one Enterprise Console sub-estate.

4.2 Creating and using groups

4.2.1 What are groups for?

You must create groups and place computers in them before you can protect and manage those computers.

Groups are useful because you can:

■

Have computers in different groups updated from different sources or on different schedules.

■

Use different anti-virus and HIPS, application control, firewall, and other policies for different groups.

Manage computers more easily.

Tip: You can create groups within groups and apply a specific set of policies to each group and subgroup.

4.2.2 What is a group?

A group is a folder that holds a number of computers.

You can create groups yourself or you can import Active Directory containers, with or without computers, and use them as computer groups in Enterprise Console. You can also set up synchronization with Active Directory so that new computers and containers as well as other changes in Active Directory are copied into Enterprise Console automatically.

Each group has settings for updating, anti-virus and HIPS protection, firewall protection, and so on. All the computers in a group should usually use these settings, which are called a “policy.”

A group can contain subgroups.

4.2.3 What is the Unassigned group?

The Unassigned group is a group where Enterprise Console holds computers before you put them into groups.

You cannot:

■

Apply policies to the Unassigned group.

■

Create subgroups in the Unassigned group.

Move or delete the Unassigned group.

Sophos Enterprise Console

4.2.4 Create a group

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

To create a new group for computers:

1. In the Endpoints view, in the Groups pane (on the left-hand side of the console), select where you want to create the group.

Click the computer name at the top if you want to create a new top-level group. Click an existing group if you want to create a subgroup.

2. On the toolbar, click the Create group icon.

A “New Group” is added to the list, with its name highlighted.

3. Type a name for the group.

Updating, anti-virus and HIPS, application control, firewall, patch, data control, device control, tamper protection, and web control policies are applied to the new group automatically. You can

edit these policies, or apply different policies. See Edit a policy (page 38) or Assign a policy to a group (page 38).

Note: If the new group is a subgroup, it initially uses the same settings as the group it is within.

4.2.5 Add computers to a group

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

1. Select the computers that you want to add to a group. For example, click the Unassigned group and select computers there.

2. Drag and drop the computers onto the new group.

If you move unprotected computers from the Unassigned group to a group that has automatic updating set up, a wizard is launched to help you protect them.

If you move computers from one group to another, they will use the same policies as the computers already in the group they are moved to.

4.2.6 Delete computers from a group

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

You can delete computers from a group, for example, if you want to remove entries for computers that are no longer on the network.

Important: If you delete computers that are still on the network, they will no longer be listed or managed by the console.

Help

Do not delete from the console computers that are encrypted with full disk encryption (page 166).

Encryption recovery may not be possible in this case.

To delete computers:

1. Select the computers that you want to delete.

2. Right-click and select Delete.

If you want to see the computers again, click the Discover computers icon on the toolbar. These computers will not be shown as managed until they are restarted.

4.2.7 Cut and paste a group

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

1. Select the group you want to cut and paste. On the Edit menu, click Cut.

2. Select the group where you want to place the group. On the Edit menu, click Paste.

4.2.8 Delete a group

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

Any computers that were in the deleted group will be placed in the Unassigned group.

1. Select the group you want to delete.

2. Right-click and select Delete. When prompted, confirm that you want to delete the group and, if the group has any subgroups, its subgroups.

4.2.9 Rename a group

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

1. Select the group you want to rename.

2. Right-click and select Rename.

4.2.10 Check which policies a group uses

To see which policies have been assigned to a group:

■

In the Groups pane, right-click the group. Select View/Edit Group Policy Details.

In the group details dialog box, you can see the policies currently used.

Sophos Enterprise Console

4.3 Creating and using policies

4.3.1 About policies

A policy is a collection of settings applied to all the computers in a group.

Note: Some features will be unavailable if your license does not include them.

■

The Updating policy specifies how computers are updated with new security software.

The Anti-virus and HIPS policy specifies how the security software scans computers for viruses, Trojans, worms, spyware, adware, potentially unwanted applications, suspicious behavior and suspicious files, and how it cleans them up.

■

The Application control policy specifies which applications are blocked and which are allowed on your computers.

The Firewall policy specifies how the firewall protects computers.

The Data control policy specifies rules for monitoring or restricting the transfer of files, based on file content, filename, or file type.

The Device control policy specifies which storage and networking devices are not authorized for use on workstations.

■

The Patch policy specifies whether patch assessment is enabled and how often computers are assessed for missing patches.

The Full disk encryption policy specifies how full disk encryption protects computers against unauthorized access.

The Tamper protection policy specifies the password that allows authorized endpoint users to re-configure, disable or uninstall Sophos security software.

The Web control policy specifies which websites can be browsed to by users. A notification is displayed to users for sites that are configured as "block" or "warn."

You can create more than one policy of each type.

You can apply the same policy to more than one group.

4.3.2 What is a policy?

A policy is a collection of settings applied to all the computers in a group.

When you install Enterprise Console, default policies that offer a basic level of security are created for you. These policies are applied to any groups you create. You can edit the default policies or create new policies.

To learn more about different types of policy, see

About policies (page 34)

4.3.3 What are the default policies?

When you install Enterprise Console, default policies are created for you.

Help

Note: Some features will be unavailable if your license does not include them.

Updating policy

The default updating policy in a fresh installation of Enterprise Console provides:

■

Automatic updating of computers every 10 minutes from the default location. The default location is a UNC share

\\<ComputerName>\SophosUpdate

, where ComputerName is the name of the computer where the update manager is installed.

Anti-virus and HIPS policy

The default anti-virus and HIPS policy in a fresh installation of Enterprise Console provides:

■

On-access scanning for viruses, Trojans, worms, spyware, and adware and other potentially unwanted applications (but not suspicious files).

■

Detection of buffer overflows and malicious and suspicious behavior of programs running on the system.

Blocking of access to websites that are known to host malware.

Scanning of content downloaded from the internet.

■

Security alerts displayed on the desktop of the affected computer and added to the event log.

For a full list of the default settings for the Anti-virus and HIPS policy in a fresh installation of

Enterprise Console, go to http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/27267.aspx

Application control policy

By default, all applications and application types are allowed. On-access scanning for applications you may want to control on your network is disabled.

Firewall policy

By default, the Sophos Client Firewall is enabled and blocks all non-essential traffic. Before you use it throughout your network, you should configure it to allow the applications you want to use.

See Set up a basic firewall policy

(page 115).

For a full list of the default firewall settings, see Sophos support knowledgebase article 57757

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/57757.aspx

Data control policy

By default, data control is turned off and no rules are specified to monitor or restrict the transfer of files to the internet or storage devices.

Device control policy

By default, device control is turned off and all devices are allowed.

Sophos Enterprise Console

Patch policy

Tamper protection policy

By default, tamper protection is turned off and no password is specified to allow authorized endpoint users to re-configure, disable or uninstall Sophos security software.

Web control policy

By default, web control is turned off, and users can visit any site that is not restricted as part of

Enterprise Console's web protection. See About web protection (page 106).

Full disk encryption policy

By default, drives on computers are not encrypted. If you select volumes to encrypt in the default policy, the selected volumes on computer drives are encrypted with fast initial encryption.

Note: The fast initial encryption mode may lead to a less secure state if a disk has been in use before encryption is applied. Unused sectors may still contain data.

For logon, the Power-on Authentication is enabled. For recovery, the recovery method

Challenge/Response is enabled and configured.

4.3.4 Do I need to create my own policies?

When you install Enterprise Console,“default” policies are created for you. These policies are applied to any groups you create.

The default policies offer a basic level of security, but to use features like network access control or application control you need to create new policies or change the default policies.

Note: When you change the default policy, the change applies to all new policies you create.

Note: If you use role-based administration, you must have a respective Policy setting right to create or edit a policy. For example, you must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to create or edit an anti-virus and HIPS policy. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

Updating policy

The default updating policy sets endpoints to check for updates to the recommended subscription every 10 minutes from the default software distribution UNC share. To change subscriptions, update locations and other settings, configure update policies as described in

About updating policy (page 76).

Help

Anti-virus and HIPS

The default anti-virus and HIPS policy protects computers against viruses and other malware.

However, to enable detection of other unwanted/suspicious applications or behavior, you may

want to create new policies, or change the default policy. See About the anti-virus and HIPS policy

(page 86).

Application control

To define and block unauthorized applications, configure application control policies as described

in About application control (page 142).

Firewall policy

To allow bona-fide applications access to a network, configure firewall policies as described in

Set up a basic firewall policy

(page 115).

Data control

By default, data control is turned off. To restrict data leakage, configure data control policies as described in

About data control (page 144).

Device control

By default, device control is turned off. To restrict allowed hardware devices, configure device

control policies as described in About device control (page 159).

Patch

By default, patch assessment is turned off. For new patch policies, assessment is turned on. Once patch assessment is turned on, computers are assessed daily for missing patches (unless you have changed the patch assessment interval). To turn patch assessment on or off or to change the assessment interval, configure patch policies as described in

About patch assessment

(page

175).

Tamper protection

By default, tamper protection is turned off. To enable tamper protection, configure tamper policies as described in

About tamper protection (page 173).

Web control

By default, web control is turned off. To turn on web control, and configure web control policies, see

About the web control policy

(page 177).

Sophos Enterprise Console

Full disk encryption

By default, drives on computers are not encrypted. To protect data on computer drives against unauthorized access by encrypting them and to specify further settings for logon and recovery, configure full disk encryption policies as described in

About full disk encryption

(page 166).

4.3.5 Create a policy

If you use role-based administration, you must have a respective Policy setting right to perform

this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

To create a policy:

1. In the Endpoints view, in the Policies pane, right-click the type of policy you want to create, for example, “Updating,” and select Create policy.

A “New Policy” is added to the list, with its name highlighted.

2. Type a new name for the policy.

3. Double-click the new policy. Enter the settings you want.

For the instructions on how to choose the settings, see the section on configuring the relevant policy.

You have created a policy that can now be applied to groups.

4.3.6 Assign a policy to a group

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

1. In the Policies pane, highlight the policy.

2. Click the policy and drag it onto the group to which you want to apply the policy. When prompted, confirm that you want to continue.

Note: Alternatively, you can right-click a group and select View/Edit Group Policy Details. You can then select policies for that group from drop-down menus.

4.3.7 Edit a policy

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have a respective Policy setting right to perform this task.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To edit a policy for a group or groups of computers:

1. In the Policies pane, double-click the policy you want to edit.

2. Edit the settings.

Help

For instructions on how to configure different policies, see the respective sections.

4.3.8 Rename a policy

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have a respective Policy setting right to perform this task.

■

You cannot rename a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Note: You cannot rename a “Default” policy.

To rename a policy:

1. In the Policies pane, select the policy you want to rename.

2. Right-click and select Rename policy.

4.3.9 Delete a policy

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have a respective Policy setting right to perform this task.

■

You cannot delete a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Note: You cannot delete a “Default” policy.

To delete a policy:

1. In the Policies pane, right-click the policy you want to delete and select Delete Policy.

2. Any groups that use the deleted policy will revert to using the default policy.

4.3.10 See which groups use a policy

To see which groups a particular policy has been applied to:

■

In the Policies pane, right-click the policy and select View Groups Using Policy.

A list of the groups that use the policy is displayed.

4.3.11 Check whether computers use the group policy

You can check whether all the computers in a group comply with the policies for that group.

1. Select the group which you want to check.

2. In the computer list, Endpoints view, on the Status tab, look in the Policy compliance column.

■

If you see the words “Same as policy”, the computer complies with the policies for its group.

If you see a yellow warning sign and the words “Differs from policy”, the computer is not using the same policy or policies as other computers in its group.

Sophos Enterprise Console

For more detailed information about the status of the security features on the computer and policies applied to the computer, see the respective tab in the Endpoints view, for example, the Anti-Virus Details tab.

If you want your computers to comply with their group policies, see Make computers use the group policy

(page 40).

4.3.12 Make computers use the group policy

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Remediation - updating and scanning

right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

If you find computers that do not comply with the policies for their group, you can apply the group policies to that computer.

1. Select the computer(s) that do not comply with the group policy.

2. Right-click and select Comply with. Then select the appropriate policy type, for example,

Group anti-virus and HIPS policy.

4.4 Discovering computers on the network

4.4.1 Choose how to discover computers

To manage computers in Enterprise Console, you first have to add them to Enterprise Console.

You can use the “Discover computers” function and choose among several options that allow you to search for networked computers and add them to Enterprise Console. There are the following options:

■

Import containers and computers from Active Directory

(page 40)

Discover computers with Active Directory (page 41)

■

Discover computers by browsing the network

(page 41)

Discover computers by IP range

(page 42)

■

Import computers from a file

(page 42)

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to add computers to the console. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

4.4.2 Import containers and computers from Active Directory

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

Importing groups from Active Directory retrieves the Active Directory container structure and copies it into Enterprise Console as a computer group structure.You can import the group structure only or groups and computers. If you choose the latter, computers found in Active Directory are placed in their respective group, and not in the Unassigned group.

Help

You can have both “normal” groups that you create and manage yourself and groups imported from Active Directory. You can also synchronize the imported groups with Active Directory.

To import groups from Active Directory:

1. On the toolbar, click the Discover computers icon.

2. In the Discover Computers dialog box, in the Import from Active Directory pane, select

Import and click OK.

Alternatively, select a group you want to import your Active Directory container(s) into, right-click and select Import from Active Directory.

The Import from Active Directory Wizard starts.

3. Follow the instructions in the wizard. When asked to choose what to import, select Computers

and containers or Containers only, depending on what you want to import.

After you have imported containers from Active Directory, apply policies to the groups. See

About policies (page 34).

After you have applied group policies to the groups, you can synchronize the groups with Active

Directory, if you want to. For instructions, see Synchronize with Active Directory (page 45).

4.4.3 Discover computers with Active Directory

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

You can use Active Directory to discover networked computers and add them to the Unassigned group.

1. On the toolbar, click the Discover computers icon.

2. In the Discover Computers dialog box, select Discover with Active Directory and click OK.

3. You are prompted to enter a username and password. You need to do this if you have computers (for example, Windows XP Service Pack 2) that cannot be accessed without account details.

The account must be a domain administrator’s account, or have full administrative rights over the target XP computers.

If you are using a domain account, you must enter the username in the form domain\user.

4. In the Discover Computers dialog box, select the domains you want to search. Click OK.

5. Click the Unassigned group to see the computers that have been found.

To begin managing computers, select them and drag them to a group.

4.4.4 Discover computers by browsing the network

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

To add a list of computers found in Windows domains and workgroups to the Unassigned group:

1. On the toolbar, click the Discover computers icon.

Sophos Enterprise Console

2. In the Discover Computers dialog box, select Discover on the network and click OK.

3. In the Credentials dialog box, enter a username and password of an account that has sufficient rights to retrieve computer information.

The account must be a domain administrator’s account or have full administrative rights over the target computers. If you are using a domain account, you must enter the username in the form domain\user.

You can skip this step if your target computers can be accessed without account details.

4. In the Discover Computers dialog box, select the domains or workgroups you want to search.

Click OK.

5. Click the Unassigned group to see the computers that have been found.

To begin managing computers, select them and drag them to a group.

4.4.5 Discover computers by IP range

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

You can use a range of IP addresses to discover networked computers and add them to the

Unassigned group.

Note: You cannot use IPv6 addresses.

1. On the toolbar, click the Discover computers icon.

2. In the Discover Computers dialog box, select Discover by IP range and click OK.

3. In the Credentials dialog box, you are prompted to enter a username and password. You need to do this if you have computers (for example, Windows XP Service Pack 2) that cannot be accessed without account details.

The account must be a domain administrator’s account, or have full administrative rights over the target XP machines.

If you are using a domain account, you must enter the username in the form domain\user.

In the SNMP pane, you can enter the SNMP community name.

4. In the Discover Computers dialog box, enter the Start of IP Range and End of IP Range.

Click OK.

5. Click the Unassigned group to see the computers that have been found.

To begin managing computers, select them and drag them to a group.

4.4.6 Import computers from a file

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

Help

To enable Enterprise Console to list your computers, you can import the computer names from a file. You can create the file using entries like this:

[GroupName1]

Domain1|Windows7|ComputerName1

Domain1|Windows2008ServerR2|ComputerName2

Note: You do not have to specify which group the computers will be put in. If you enter

[]

(with no space between the brackets) for the group name, computers will be put in the Unassigned group.

Note: Valid operating system names are: Windows2000, Windows2000Server, WindowsXP,

Windows2003, WindowsVista, Windows7, WindowsServer2008, Windows2008ServerR2,

Windows8, WindowsServer2012, MACOSX, Linux, and Unix.

The domain name and the operating system are both optional. So an entry can look like this:

[GroupName1]

ComputerName1

You import computer names as follows:

1. On the File menu, click Import Computers from File.

2. In the browser window, select the file.

3. Click the Unassigned group to see the computers that have been found.

4. To begin managing computers, select them and drag them to a group.

4.5 Synchronizing with Active Directory

4.5.1 About synchronization with Active Directory

This section gives an overview of Active Directory synchronization.

What does Active Directory synchronization do for me?

With Active Directory synchronization, you can synchronize Enterprise Console groups with Active

Directory containers. New computers and containers discovered in Active Directory are copied into Enterprise Console automatically. You can also choose to protect discovered Windows workstations automatically. This allows you to minimize the time in which computers can become infected and reduce the amount of work you need to do to organize and protect computers.

Note: Computers running Windows server operating systems, Mac OS, Linux, or UNIX are not protected automatically. You must protect such computers manually.

After you have set up synchronization, you can set up email alerts to be sent to your chosen recipients about new computers and containers discovered during future synchronizations. If you choose to protect computers in synchronized Enterprise Console groups automatically, you can also set up alerts about automatic protection failures.

Sophos Enterprise Console

How does Active Directory synchronization work?

In Enterprise Console, you can have both “normal,” unsynchronized groups that you manage yourself and groups synchronized with Active Directory.

When setting up synchronization, you select or create a synchronization point: an Enterprise

Console group to be synchronized with an Active Directory container. All computers and subgroups contained in the Active Directory are copied into Enterprise Console and kept synchronized with

Active Directory.

Note: To learn more about synchronization points, see

What is a synchronization point?

(page

45) To learn more about synchronized groups, see

What is a synchronized group?

(page 45)

After you set up synchronization with Active Directory, the synchronized part of Enterprise Console group structure matches exactly the Active Directory container it is synchronized with. This means the following:

■

If a new computer is added to the Active Directory container, then it also appears in Enterprise

Console.

If a computer is removed from Active Directory or is moved into an unsynchronized container, then the computer is moved to the Unassigned group in Enterprise Console.

Note: When a computer is moved to the Unassigned group, it stops receiving new policies.

■

If a computer is moved from one synchronized container to another, then the computer is moved from one Enterprise Console group to the other.

If a computer already exists in an Enterprise Console group when it is first synchronized, then it is moved from that group to the synchronized group that matches its location in Active

Directory.

■

When a computer is moved into a new group with different policies, then new policies are sent to the computer.

By default, synchronization occurs every 60 minutes.You may change the synchronization interval if required.

How do I approach synchronization?

It is your decision what groups to synchronize with Active Directory and how many synchronization points to set up. Consider whether the size of groups that will be created will be manageable.

You should be able to deploy software, scan and clean up computers easily. This is especially important for the initial deployment.

The recommended approach is as follows:

1. Import the group structure (without computers), using the Import from Active Directory function. For instructions, see

Import containers and computers from Active Directory (page

40).

2. Review the imported group structure and choose your synchronization points.

3. Set up group policies and apply them to the groups and subgroups. For instructions, see

Create a policy (page 38) and Assign a policy to a group

(page 38).

4. Synchronize your chosen synchronization points, one at a time, with Active Directory. For

instructions, see Synchronize with Active Directory (page 45).

Help

4.5.2 What is a synchronization point?

A synchronization point is an Enterprise Console group that points to a container (or subtree) in

Active Directory. A synchronization point can contain synchronized groups imported from Active

Directory.

In the Groups pane, a synchronization point appears as follows:

You can move, rename, or delete a synchronization point. You can also change policies and synchronization settings, including automatic protection settings, for a synchronization point.

You cannot create or delete subgroups in a synchronization point, or move other groups into it.

You cannot move computers into or from the synchronization point.

4.5.3 What is a synchronized group?

A synchronized group is a subgroup of a synchronization point, imported from Active Directory.

In the Groups pane, a synchronized group appears as follows:

You can change policies assigned to a synchronized group.

You cannot change any synchronized group settings other than group policies.You cannot rename, move, or delete a synchronized group. You cannot move computers or groups into or from the group. You cannot create or delete subgroups in the group. You cannot change synchronization settings for the group.

4.5.4 Synchronize with Active Directory

Before you perform this task:

■

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

■

If you want to protect computers in synchronized groups automatically, make sure you have prepared the computers as described in

Prepare for installation of anti-virus software (page

50).

To synchronize with Active Directory:

1. Select a group that will become your synchronization point, right-click and select Synchronize

with Active Directory.

The Synchronize with Active Directory wizard starts.

2. On the Overview page of the wizard, click Next.

3. On the Choose an Enterprise Console group page, select or create an Enterprise Console group that you want keep synchronized with Active Directory (synchronization point). Click

Next.

Sophos Enterprise Console

4. On the Choose an Active Directory container page, select an Active Directory container which you want to synchronize the group with. Enter the name of the container (for example,

LDAP://CN=Computers,DC=domain_name,DC=local) or click Browse to browse to the container in Active Directory. Click Next.

Important: If a computer exists in more than one synchronized Active Directory container, it causes a problem, with messages being exchanged continually between the computer and

Enterprise Console. Each computer should be listed only once in Enterprise Console.

5. If you want to protect Windows workstations automatically, on the page Protect Computers

Automatically, select the check box Install Sophos security software automatically, and then select the software you want to install.

Note: For a list of system requirements for the software, see the system requirements page on the Sophos website ( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/products/all-system-requirements.aspx

■

Before installing Firewall on computers, make sure you have configured the firewall to allow the traffic, applications, and processes you want to use. By default, the firewall is enabled and blocks all non-essential traffic. See Configuring policies > Configuring the

firewall policy section.

Leave Third-Party Security Software Detection selected if you want to have another vendor's software removed automatically. If you need to remove another vendor's updating tool, see

Remove third-party security software

(page 51).

All Windows workstations discovered during this and future synchronizations will be protected automatically, in compliance with their respective group policies.

Important: Computers running Windows server operating systems, Mac OS, Linux, or UNIX will not be protected automatically. You must protect such computers manually, as described in the Sophos Enterprise Console advanced startup guide.

Note: You can enable or disable automatic protection later, in the Synchronization properties dialog box. For instructions, see

View and edit synchronization properties (page 47).

Click Next.

6. If you chose to protect computers automatically, on the Enter Active Directory Credentials page, enter the details of an administrator account that will be used to install software on the computers. Click Next.

7. On the Choose the Synchronization Interval page, choose how often you want to synchronize the Enterprise Console group with the Active Directory container. The default is 60 minutes.

Note: You can change the synchronization interval later, in the Synchronization properties dialog box. For instructions, see

View and edit synchronization properties (page 47).

8. On the Confirm Your Choices page, check the details, and then click Next to proceed.

9. On the last page of wizard, you can view the details of the groups and computers that have been synchronized.

You can also set up email alerts to be sent to your chosen recipients about new computers and groups discovered during future synchronizations. If you chose to protect computers in synchronized groups automatically, you can also set up alerts about automatic protection failures. To open the Configure Email Alerts dialog box after you click Finish, select the check box on the last page of the wizard. For instructions, see

Set up Active Directory synchronization email alerts

(page 193).

To close the wizard, click Finish.

Help

4.5.5 Use synchronization to protect computers automatically

Before you perform this task:

■

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

■

Make sure you have prepared computers for automatic installation of the security software as

described in Prepare for installation of anti-virus software

(page 50).

Windows workstations can be protected automatically when discovered during synchronization with Active Directory.

Important: Computers running Windows server operating systems, Mac OS, Linux, or UNIX will not be protected automatically. You must protect such computers manually as described in the

Sophos Enterprise Console advanced startup guide.

You can protect computers in synchronized groups automatically either when setting up

synchronization (see Synchronize with Active Directory

(page 45)), or by editing the synchronization properties later.

The instructions below tell you how to protect computers by editing the synchronization properties.

1. In the Groups pane, select the group (synchronization point) for which you want to enable automatic protection. Right-click the group and select Synchronization Properties.

2. In the Synchronization Properties dialog box, select the Install Sophos security software

automatically check box, and then select the software you want to install.

■

firewall policy section.

Leave Third-Party Security Software Detection selected if you want to have another vendor's software removed automatically. If you need to remove another vendor's updating tool, see

Remove third-party security software

(page 51).

3. Enter the username and password of an administrator account that will be used to install software on the computers. Click OK.

Should you want to disable automatic protection later, in the Synchronization Properties dialog box, clear the Install Sophos security software automatically check box.

4.5.6 View and edit synchronization properties

Before you perform this task:

■

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

■

If you want to protect computers in synchronized groups automatically, make sure you have prepared the computers as described in

Prepare for installation of anti-virus software (page

50).

Sophos Enterprise Console

To view and edit synchronization properties:

1. In the Groups pane, select the group (synchronization point) for which you want to edit synchronization properties. Right-click the group and select Synchronization Properties.

The Synchronization Properties dialog box appears.

2. In the Active Directory container field, you can see the container which the group is synchronized with. If you want to synchronize the group with a different container, remove synchronization and run the Synchronize with Active Directory wizard again. See

Turn synchronization on or off

(page 48) and

Synchronize with Active Directory

(page 45).

3. In the Synchronization interval field, set the frequency of synchronization. The default is 60 minutes. The minimum is 5 minutes.

4. Select the Install Sophos security software automatically check box if you want to protect all newly discovered Windows workstations automatically, in compliance with their respective group policies. Under Features, the anti-virus protection is selected by default. If you want to have other Sophos security software installed, select the relevant check boxes. Enter the username and password of an administrator account that will be used to install software on the computers.

Note: Only Windows workstations can be protected automatically. Computers running Windows server operating systems, Mac OS, Linux, or UNIX cannot be protected automatically. You must protect such computers manually, as described in the Sophos Enterprise Console advanced

startup guide.

4.5.7 Synchronize with Active Directory now

Before you perform this task:

■

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

■

If you want to protect computers in synchronized groups automatically, make sure you have prepared the computers as described in

Prepare for installation of anti-virus software (page

50).

You can synchronize Enterprise Console groups (synchronization points) with Active Directory containers immediately, without waiting for the next scheduled synchronization.

To synchronize with Active Directory immediately:

1. In the Groups pane, select the group (synchronization point) which you want to synchronize with Active Directory. Right-click the group and select Synchronization Properties.

2. In the Synchronization Properties dialog box, make changes as appropriate and click OK.

4.5.8 Turn synchronization on or off

Before you perform this task:

■

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

■

If you want to protect computers in synchronized groups automatically, make sure you have prepared the computers as described in

Prepare for installation of anti-virus software (page

50).

Help

To turn synchronization with Active Directory on or off:

■

To turn the synchronization on, run the Synchronize with Active Directory wizard as described in

Synchronize with Active Directory

(page 45).

■

To turn the synchronization off, select the group (synchronization point) which you do not want to synchronize with Active Directory anymore, right-click and select Remove Synchronization.

Click Yes to confirm.

4.6 Configuring the Sophos Mobile Control URL

4.6.1 Configure the Sophos Mobile Control URL

Sophos Mobile Control is a device management solution for mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets. Sophos Mobile Control helps to keep corporate data safe by managing apps and security settings.

You can open the Sophos Mobile Control web console from Enterprise Console by clicking the

Sophos Mobile Control toolbar button. To do this, you first need to configure the Sophos Mobile

Control URL.

1. On the Tools menu, click Configure Mobile Control URL.

2. In the Sophos Mobile Control URL dialog box, enter the URL of the Sophos Mobile Control web console and click OK.

Sophos Enterprise Console

5 Protecting computers

5.1 About protecting computers

You can install Sophos protection software in the following ways:

■

To protect computers automatically, use the protect computer wizard provided in Enterprise

Console, see Protect computers automatically (page 52).

■

Alternatively, you can protect computers automatically using Active Directory synchronization,

see About synchronization with Active Directory (page 43).

To protect computers manually, Enterprise Console helps to locate the required software, see

Locate installers for protecting computers manually (page 55). Then go to the respective

computer and install the protection software manually.

5.2 Prepare for installation of anti-virus software

As well as ensuring that computers meet the general system requirements, you must perform further steps before you can install software on them automatically.

Note: Automatic installation is not possible on Mac, Linux and UNIX computers.

If you use Active Directory, you can prepare your computers using a Group Policy Object (GPO).

For instructions, see Sophos support knowledgebase article 116754

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/116754.aspx

If you use workgroups, you must configure computers locally. For instructions, see Sophos support knowledgebase article 116755

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/116755.aspx

5.3 Prepare for installation of encryption software

As well as ensuring that computers meet the general system requirements, you must perform further steps before you can install software on them automatically.

To prepare computers for installation of encryption software:

1. Make sure that drives encrypted with third-party encryption software have been decrypted and that the third-party encryption software is uninstalled.

2. Create a full backup of the data.

3. Check if a Windows user account with credentials is set up and active for the user on the endpoint computer.

4. Make sure that the computer has already been protected with Sophos anti-virus software before you deploy full disk encryption.

5. Uninstall third-party boot managers, such as PROnetworks Boot Pro and Boot-US.

Help

6. Check the hard disk(s) for errors with this command:

chkdsk %drive% /F /V /X

. You might be prompted to restart the computer and run chkdsk again.

For further information, see: http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/107799.aspx

You can check the results (log file) in Windows Event Viewer:

■

Windows XP: Select Application, Winlogon.

■

Windows 7, Windows Vista: Select Windows Logs, Application, Wininit.

7. Use the Windows built-in

defrag

tool to locate and consolidate fragmented boot files, data files, and folders on local drives:

defrag %drive%

For further information, see: http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/109226.aspx

8. If you have used an imaging/cloning tool on the computer, clean the master boot record (MBR).

Start the computer from a Windows DVD and use the command

FIXMBR

within the Windows

Recovery Console. For further information, see: http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/108088.aspx

9. If the boot partition on the computer has been converted from FAT to NTFS, and the computer has not been restarted since then, restart the computer. If you do not do this, the installation may not complete successfully.

10. Open Windows Firewall with Advanced Security, using the Administrative Tools item in

Control Panel. Ensure that Inbound connections are allowed. Change the Inbound rules to enable the processes below:

Remote Administration (NP-In) Domain

Remote Administration (NP-In) Private

Remote Administration (RPC) Domain

Remote Administration (RPC) Private

Remote Administration (RPC-EPMAP) Domain

Remote Administration (RPC-EPMAP) Private

When installation is complete, do one of the following:

■

If you do not want to install any further features on the endpoints and want to continue using Windows Firewall, you may disable the process again.

■

If you want to install any further features on the endpoints, leave the processes enabled until all features are installed.

5.4 Remove third-party security software

If you want to remove any previously installed security software, do the following BEFORE selecting the Third-Party Security Software Detection in the Protect Computers Wizard and installing it:

■

If computers are running another vendor's anti-virus software, ensure that its user interface is closed.

If computers are running another vendor's firewall or HIPS product, ensure that it is turned off or configured to allow the Sophos installer to run.

Sophos Enterprise Console

■

If you want to remove not just the other vendor's software but also the other vendor's update tool (to prevent it from reinstalling the software automatically), follow the steps below. If computers have no update tool installed, you can disregard the steps below.

Note: You have to locally restart any computers from which you remove third-party anti-virus software.

If computers have another vendor's update tool installed and you wish to remove the update tool, you will need to modify the configuration file before selecting the Third-Party Security Software

Detection option in the Protect Computers Wizard.

Note: If computers are running another vendor's firewall or HIPS product, you may need to leave that vendor's update tool intact. See that vendor's documentation for clarification.

To modify the configuration file:

1. From the Central Installation Directory, find the data.zip file.

2. Extract the crt.cfg configuration file from data.zip.

3. Edit the crt.cfg file to change the line reading "RemoveUpdateTools=0" to

"RemoveUpdateTools=1".

4. Save your changes and save crt.cfg to the same directory that contains data.zip. Do not put crt.cfg back into data.zip or it will be overwritten the next time the data.zip file is updated.

When you run the Protect Computers Wizard and select Third-Party Security Software

Detection, the modified configuration file will now remove any third-party security update tools as well as third-party security software.

5.5 Protect computers automatically

Before you protect computers from the console:

■

You must apply an updating policy to the group before you can protect computers in that group.

■

Make sure you have prepared computers for automatic installation of the security software as

described in Prepare for installation of anti-virus software

(page 50).

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups right to protect computers. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

Automatic installation is not possible on Mac, Linux and UNIX computers. Use manual installation instead. For the instructions, see the Sophos Enterprise Console advanced startup guide. Sophos documentation is published at http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/documentation .

If you chose to synchronize with Active Directory and protect the computers automatically, you

do not need to follow the steps below. For details, see

About synchronization with Active Directory

(page 43) and other related topics.

To protect computers automatically:

1. Depending on whether or not the computers you want to protect are already in a group, do one of the following:

■

If the computers you want to protect are in the Unassigned group, drag the computers onto a group.

If the computers you want to protect are already in a group, select the computers, right-click and click Protect Computers.

Help

The Protect Computers Wizard is launched.

2. Follow the instructions in the wizard. On the Select features page, select the features you want.

Note: For a list of system requirements for the features, see the system requirements page on the Sophos website ( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/products/all-system-requirements ).

Some features, including anti-virus protection, are always selected and must be installed. You can also select to install the features listed below. Some of the features are available only if your license includes them.

■

Firewall

Before installing the firewall on computers, make sure you have configured the firewall to allow the traffic, applications, and processes you want to use. By default, the firewall is enabled and blocks all non-essential traffic. See Configuring policies > Configuring the

firewall policy section.

■

Patch

Third-Party Security Software Detection

Leave Third-Party Security Software Detection selected if you want to have another vendor's software removed automatically. The Third-Party Security Software Detection uninstalls only products with the same functionality as those you install. If you need to

remove another vendor's updating tool, see Remove third-party security software (page

51).

3. On the Protection summary page, any problems with installation are shown in the Protection

issues column. Troubleshoot the installation (see

Sophos Endpoint Security and Control installation failed

(page 223)), or carry out manual installation on these computers (see the

Sophos Enterprise Console advanced startup guide). Click Next.

4. On the Credentials page, enter details of an account which can be used to install software.

This account is typically a domain administrator account. It must:

■

Have local administrator rights on computers you want to protect.

Be able to log on to the computer where you installed the management server.

Have read access to the Primary server location specified in the Updating policy. See

About update server locations (page 77) and other topics in section Configuring update

server locations.

Note: If you are using a domain account, you must enter the username in the form

domain\user

If the computers are on different domains covered by the same Active Directory schema, use the Enterprise Administrator account in Active Directory instead.

5.6 Install encryption software automatically

Caution: If you are installing the Sophos encryption software for the first time, we strongly recommend that you enable and test each setting step-by-step.

Sophos Enterprise Console

You can install encryption software automatically on Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows

7 computers.

Before you install the software on computers, you must:

■

Make sure that drives encrypted with third-party encryption software have been decrypted and that the third-party encryption software is uninstalled.

■

Create a full backup of the data.

Further prepare as follows:

■

Make sure that you have carried out the steps as described in

Prepare for installation of encryption software

(page 50), in particular that the Sophos anti-virus software version 10 has been installed.

Make sure that you have subscribed to and downloaded the encryption software. For further information, see

Subscribe to encryption software (page 75).

■

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection and

groups and Policy setting - full disk encryption right to install and configure encryption on

computers. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

To install encryption software on computers automatically:

1. In Enterprise Console, select the computers on which you want to install full disk encryption.

2. Right-click the computers, and then click Protect Computers. The Protect Computers Wizard is launched.

3. On the Welcome page, click Next.

4. On the Installation Type page, select Encryption software.

5. If there is more than one encryption subscription and installer location (bootstrap location) available, the Encryption location page is displayed. Select the Encryption subscription and Address to install from.

6. On the Encryption summary page, any problems with installation are shown in the Encryption

issues column. Troubleshoot the installation (see

Sophos Endpoint Security and Control installation failed

(page 223)) or carry out manual installation on these computers (see the

Sophos Enterprise Console advanced startup guide).

7. On the Credentials page, enter details of an account which can be used to install software.

This account is typically a domain administrator account. It must:

■

Have local administrator rights on computers you want to protect.

Be able to log on to the computer where you installed the management server.

Have read access to the Primary server location specified in the Updating policy. See

About update server locations (page 77) and other topics in section Configuring update

server locations.

Note: If you are using a domain account, you must enter the username in the form

domain\user

If the computers are on different domains covered by the same Active Directory schema, use the Enterprise Administrator account in Active Directory instead.

Installation is staggered, so the process may not be complete on all the computers for some time.

Help

The installation of encryption will cause computers to restart automatically within about 30 minutes after installation of the encryption software.

By default, full disk encryption is not enabled after installation. To enable it, configure the full disk encryption policy to your needs and assign it to the computers. For further information, see

Configure full disk encryption (page 167).

For further information on the start behavior of the computer and first logon after installation and activation of full disk encryption, see the Sophos Disk Encryption 5.61 help or the Enterprise

Console quick/advanced startup guides.

5.7 Locate installers for protecting computers manually

If Enterprise Console is unable to install anti-virus, firewall, or patch features on certain computers automatically, you can perform the installation manually.

To locate the installers:

1. On the View menu, click Bootstrap Locations.

2. In the Bootstrap Locations dialog box, for each software subscription, you will see the locations that contain the software installers, as well as platforms that the software is supported on and the software versions. Make a note of the location for the installer that you need.

If your license includes full disk encryption, make sure that you have prepared the endpoints for encryption. First install Sophos anti-virus software version 10 if not already done. Next install the encryption software. The location of the installer that includes the encryption software is displayed to you (setup.exe).

For information about how to install security software manually on different operating systems, see the Sophos Enterprise Console advanced startup guide.

The installation of encryption will cause computers to restart automatically within about 30 minutes after installation of the encryption software.

For further information on the start behavior of the computer and first logon after installation and activation of full disk encryption, see the Sophos Disk Encryption user help or the Enterprise

Console quick/advanced startup guides.

5.8 Checking whether your network is protected

5.8.1 How do I check that my network is protected?

For an overview of the network's security status, use the Dashboard. For more information, see

Dashboard panels

(page 10) and Configure the Dashboard (page 56).

You can identify computers with a problem by using the computer list and computer list filters.

For example, you can see which computers do not have the firewall or patch features installed, or have alerts that need attention. For more information, see

Check that computers are protected

(page 56), Check that computers are up to date

(page 57), and Find computers with problems

(page 58).

Sophos Enterprise Console

You can also check whether all the computers in a group comply with the policies for that group, as described in

Check whether computers use the group policy

(page 39).

5.8.2 Configure the Dashboard

If you use role-based administration, you must have the System configuration right to configure the Dashboard. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

The Dashboard displays warning or critical status indicators based on the percentage of managed computers that have outstanding alerts or errors, or on the time since the last update from Sophos.

You can set up the warning and critical levels you want to use.

1. On the Tools menu, click Configure Dashboard.

2. In the Configure Dashboard dialog box, change the threshold values in the Warning level and Critical level text boxes as described below.

a) Under Computers with outstanding alerts, Computers with Sophos product errors, and Policy and protection, enter a percentage of managed computers affected by a particular problem, that will trigger the change of the respective indicator to “warning” or

“critical.” b) Under Computers with events, enter the number of events occurred within a seven-day period that will trigger an alert displayed on the Dashboard.

c) Under Latest protection from Sophos, enter the time since last successful update from

Sophos in hours, that will trigger the change of the “Updates” indicator to “warning” or

“critical.” Click OK.

If you set a level to zero, warnings are triggered as soon as the first alert is received.

You can also set up email alerts to be sent to your chosen recipients when a warning or critical

threshold has been exceeded. For instructions, see Set up network status email alerts

(page 192).

5.8.3 Check that computers are protected

Computers are protected if they are running on-access scanning and the firewall (if you have installed it). For full protection, the software must also be up to date.

Note: You may have chosen not to use on-access scanning on certain types of computer, for example, file servers. In this case, ensure that the computers use scheduled scans and that they are up to date.

To check that computers are protected:

1. Select the group of computers you want to check.

2. If you want to check computers in subgroups of the group, select At this level and below in the drop-down list.

3. In the list of computers, on the Status tab, look in the On-access column.

If you see “Active,” the computer is running on-access scanning. If you see a gray shield, it is not.

Help

4. If you installed the firewall, look in the Firewall enabled column.

If you see “Yes,” the firewall is enabled. If you see a gray firewall sign and the word “No,” the firewall is disabled.

5. If you use other features, such as application control, data control, or patch, check the status in the respective column.

For information about how to check that computers are up to date, see Check that computers are up to date

(page 57).

For information about how to find computers with problems using the computer list filters, see

Find computers with problems

(page 58).

5.8.4 Check that computers are up to date

If you set up Enterprise Console as recommended, computers should receive updates automatically.

To check that computers are up to date:

1. Select the group of computers you want to check.

2. If you want to check computers in any subgroups, select At this level and below in the drop-down list.

3. On the Status tab, look in the Up to date column, or go to the Update details tab.

■

If you see “Yes” in the Up to date column, the computer is up to date.

If you see a clock icon, the computer is out of date. The text indicates how long the computer has been out of date.

For information about updating such out-of-date computers, see

Update out-of-date computers

(page 84).

5.8.5 Check that computers are encrypted

If you set up a Full disk encryption policy to protect the data on endpoint computers from being read or changed by unauthorized persons, drives on these computers should be encrypted.

To check that computers are encrypted:

1. Select the group of computers you want to check.

2. If you want to check computers in any subgroups, select At this level and below in the drop-down list.

3. On the Status tab, look in the Full disk encryption column.

Alternatively, go to the Encryption tab.

The Full disk encryption column shows the encryption status of the computers. The column can be empty for the following reasons:

■

The encryption software has not been installed on the computer.

Sophos Enterprise Console

■

The encryption software has been installed on the computer but the computer has not been restarted yet. The computers will be restarted within 30 minutes after the installation of the encryption software.

An encryption error occurred.

■

The computer is not managed by the Sophos Enterprise Console.

Check the Encryption Event Viewer to find out if an encryption error occurred. The relevant error is displayed there.

5.8.6 Find computers with problems

To display a list of computers that are not properly protected or have other protection-related problems:

1. Select the group of computers you want to check.

2. In the View drop-down list, select which computers you want to find, for example, Computers

with potential problems.

You can also select a subentry of an entry, to display computers affected by a specific problem

(for example, computers that differ from group policy, computers with outstanding alerts, or computers where an installation error has occurred).

3. If the group contains subgroups, select also whether you want to find computers At this level

only or At this level and below.

Any computers that have protection problems will be listed.

You can also filter the computer list by the name of a detected item such as malware, potentially

unwanted application, or suspicious file. For more information, see Filter computers by the name of a detected item (page 15).

Help

For information about dealing with protection problems, see Computers are not running on-access scanning (page 221) and other topics in the Troubleshooting section.

5.9 Dealing with alerts and errors

5.9.1 What do the alert icons mean?

If a virus or spyware, a suspicious item, an adware or other potentially unwanted application is detected, alert icons are displayed on the Status tab in the Endpoints view.

Below is a key to the alert icons. The other topics in this section give advice on dealing with alerts.

Note: Warnings are also displayed in the console if software is disabled or out of date. For information on this, see

How do I check that my network is protected?

(page 55).

Alert icons

Icon Explanation

A red warning sign displayed in the Alerts and errors column means that a virus, worm, Trojan, spyware, or suspicious behavior has been detected.

A yellow warning sign displayed in the Alerts and errors column indicates one of the following problems:

A suspicious file has been detected.

An adware or other potentially unwanted application has been detected.

An error has occurred.

A yellow warning sign displayed in the Policy compliance column indicates that the computer is not using the same policy or policies as other computers in its group.

1. Virus and spyware alerts

2. Suspicious behavior alerts

3. Suspicious file alerts

4. Adware and PUA alerts

5. Software application errors (for example, installation errors)

For more details about an alert, for example, the name of the detected item, click the Alert and

Error Details tab.

For information about update manager alerts, see

Monitor update managers (page 83).

Sophos Enterprise Console

5.9.2 Deal with alerts about detected items

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Remediation - cleanup right to clean

up detected items or clear alerts from the console. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

To take action against alerts displayed in the console:

1. In the Endpoints view, select the computer(s) for which you want to see alerts. Right-click and select Resolve Alerts and Errors.

The Resolve alerts and errors dialog box is displayed.

2. The action you can take against an alert depends on the cleanup status of the alert. Look in the Cleanup status column and decide what action you want to take.

Tip: You can sort alerts by clicking on a column heading. For example, to sort alerts by cleanup status, click the Cleanup status column heading.

Cleanup status Description and actions to take

Cleanable

Threat type not cleanable

Not cleanable

Full scan required

Restart required

You can remove the item. To do this, select the alert or alerts and click Cleanup.

This type of detected item, for example, suspicious file or suspicious behavior, cannot be cleaned up from the console. You have to decide whether you want to allow or block the item. If you do not trust the item, you can send it to Sophos for

analysis. For more information, see Find information about detected items

(page

61).

This item cannot be cleaned up from the console. For more information about the item and actions you can take against it, see

Find information about detected items

(page 61).

This item may be cleanable, but a full scan of the endpoint is required before the

cleanup can be carried out. For instructions, see Scan computers now (page 62).

The item has been partially removed, but the endpoint needs to be restarted to complete the cleanup.

Note: Endpoints must be restarted locally, not from Enterprise Console.

Cleanup failed The item could not be removed. Manual cleanup may be required. For more

information, see Deal with detected items if cleanup fails (page 63).

Cleanup in progress

(started <time>)

Cleanup is in progress.

Help

Cleanup status Description and actions to take

Cleanup timed out

(started <time>)

Cleanup has timed out. The item may not have been cleaned up. This may happen, for example, when the endpoint is disconnected from the network or the network is busy. You may try to clean up the item again later.

If you decided to allow an item, see

Authorize adware and PUAs (page 110) or

Authorize suspicious items

(page 112).

5.9.3 Find information about detected items

If you want to learn more about a threat or other item detected on an endpoint and reported in the console, or need advice on what action to take against the item, follow these steps:

1. In the Endpoints view, in the computer list, double-click the affected computer.

2. In the Computer details dialog box, scroll down to the Outstanding alerts and errors section.

In the list of detected items, click the name of the item you are interested in.

This connects you to the Sophos website, where you can read a description of the item and advice on what actions to take against it.

Note: Alternatively, you can go to the Security analyses page on the Sophos website

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/threat-center/threat-analyses/viruses-and-spyware.aspx

), go to the tab for the type of item you want to find, and either type the name of the item in the search box or look for the item in the list of items.

5.9.4 Clear endpoint alerts or errors from the console

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Remediation - cleanup right to clear

alerts or errors from the console. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page

20).

If you are taking action to deal with an alert, or are sure that a computer is safe, you can clear the alert sign displayed in the console.

Note: You cannot clear alerts about installation errors. These are cleared only when Sophos

Endpoint Security and Control is installed successfully on the computer.

1. In the Endpoints view, select the computer(s) for which you want to clear alerts. Right-click and select Resolve Alerts and Errors.

The Resolve alerts and errors dialog box is displayed.

2. To clear alerts or Sophos product errors from the console, go to the Alerts or Errors tab, respectively, select the alerts or errors you want to clear and click Acknowledge.

Acknowledged (cleared) alerts are no longer displayed in the console.

For information about clearing update manager alerts from the console, see

Clear update manager alerts from the console (page 84).

Sophos Enterprise Console

5.10 Scanning and cleaning up computers now

5.10.1 Scan computers now

You can scan a computer or computers immediately, without waiting for the next scheduled scan.

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Remediation - updating and scanning

right to scan computers. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

Note: Only Windows, Linux and UNIX computers can perform immediate full system scans originated from the console.

To scan computers immediately:

1. Select the computers in the computer list or a group in the Groups pane. Right-click and select

Full system scan.

Alternatively, on the Actions menu, select Full system scan.

2. In the Full system scan dialog box, review the details of the computers to be scanned and click OK to start the scan.

Note: If the scan detects components of a threat in memory, the scan stops and an alert is sent to Enterprise Console. This is because further scanning could enable the threat to spread. You must clean up the threat before running the scan again.

5.10.2 Clean up computers now

You can immediately clean up Windows or Mac computers that are infected with a virus or have unwanted applications on them.

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Remediation - cleanup right to clean

up computers. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Note: To clean up Linux or UNIX computers, you can either set up automatic cleanup from the console (see

Set up automatic cleanup for on-access scanning (page 91)) or clean up the

computers individually as described in

Deal with detected items if cleanup fails (page 63).

If an item (for example, a Trojan or potentially unwanted application) has been “partially detected”, before cleaning up the affected computer you will need to carry out a full system scan of the computer to find all the components of the partially detected item. In the computer list, Endpoints view, right-click the affected computer and click Full System Scan. For more information, see

Partially detected item

(page 224).

To clean up computers immediately:

1. In the computer list, Endpoints view, right-click the computer(s) that you want to clean up and then click Resolve Alerts and Errors.

2. In the Resolve Alerts and Errors dialog box, on the Alerts tab, select the check box for each item you want to clean up, or click Select all. Click Cleanup.

If the cleanup is successful, the alerts shown in the list of computers will no longer be displayed.

If any alerts remain, you should clean up computers manually. See

Deal with detected items if cleanup fails

(page 63).

Help

Note: Cleanup of some viruses causes a full system scan to be run on the affected computers, which tries to clean up all the viruses. This might take a long time. The alerts are updated at the end of the scan.

5.10.3 Deal with detected items if cleanup fails

If you cannot clean up computers from the console, you can perform the cleanup manually.

1. In the computer list, double-click the infected computer.

2. In the Computer details dialog box, scroll down to the Outstanding alerts and errors section.

In the list of detected items, click the name of the item you want to remove from the computer.

This connects you to the Sophos website, where you can read advice on how to clean up the computer.

3. Go to the computer and carry out the cleanup manually.

Note: The Sophos website provides special downloadable disinfectors for certain viruses and worms.

Sophos Enterprise Console

6 Updating computers

6.1 Configuring the update manager

6.1.1 What is an update manager?

An update manager enables you to set up automatic updating of Sophos security software from a Sophos website. An update manager is installed with and managed from Enterprise Console.

Note: To update encryption software, use the protect computers wizard. For information, see

Install encryption software automatically (page 53).

You can install additional update managers. For example, if you have a complex network with several locations, you may want to install an additional update manager at a remote location. For

information, see Add an additional update manager (page 70).

6.1.2 How does an update manager work?

Once you have configured an update manager, it:

■

Connects at a scheduled frequency to a data distribution warehouse at Sophos or on your network.

■

Downloads updates to the threat detection data and updates for the security software to which the administrator has subscribed.

Places the updated software in one or more network shares in a form suitable for installation on endpoint computers.

The computers update automatically from the shares, provided the Sophos software installed on them has been configured to do so, for example, by applying an updating policy.

6.1.3 View or edit update manager configuration

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an update manager. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

1. If you are in the Endpoints view, click the Update managers button on the toolbar to display the Update managers view.

2. In the list of update managers, select the update manager whose configuration you want to view or edit. Right-click and click View/Edit configuration.

Note: Alternatively, select the update manager, go to the Actions menu, point to Update

manager, and then click View/Edit configuration.

The Configure update manager dialog box appears.

Help

3. Edit the configuration as described in the following topics:

■

Select an update source for an update manager

(page 65).

■

Select which software to download (page 66).

Specify where the software is placed

(page 66).

■

Create or edit an update schedule

(page 68).

Configure the update manager log (page 68).

Configure the self-updating of an update manager

(page 69).

For information about clearing update manager alerts from the console, see

Clear update manager alerts from the console (page 84).

After you configure the update manager, you can configure your updating policies and apply them to the endpoint computers.

6.1.4 Select an update source for an update manager

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an update manager. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

You need to select a source from which an update manager will download security software and updates for distribution across the network.

You can select several sources. The first source in the list is the primary source. Additional sources in the list are optional alternate locations that the update manager uses if it cannot collect an update from the primary source.

1. If you are in the Endpoints view, click the Update managers button on the toolbar to display the Update managers view.

2. In the list of update managers, select the update manager for which you want to select an update source. Right-click and click View/Edit configuration.

3. In the Configure update manager dialog box, on the Sources tab, click Add.

4. In the Source details dialog box, in the Address field, enter the address of the source. The address can be a UNC or HTTP path.

If you want to download software and updates directly from Sophos, select Sophos.

5. If necessary, in the Username and Password fields, enter the username and password for the account that will be used to access the update source.

■

If the update source is Sophos, enter the download credentials supplied by Sophos.

If the update source is the default update share created by an update manager located higher in the updating hierarchy, the Username and Password fields will be pre-populated.

The default update share is a UNC share

\\<ComputerName>\SophosUpdate

, where

ComputerName is the name of the computer where the update manager is installed.

■

If the update source is a non-default update share on your network, enter credentials for the account that has read rights to the share. If the Username needs to be qualified to indicate the domain, use the form domain\username.

Sophos Enterprise Console

6. If you access the update source via a proxy server, select Use a proxy server to connect.

Then enter the proxy server Address and Port number. Enter a Username and Password that give access to the proxy server. If the username needs to be qualified to indicate the domain, use the form domain\username. Click OK.

The new source appears in the list in the Configure update manager dialog box.

If you have already installed an update manager on a different computer, the share where that update manager downloads software and updates will appear on the list of addresses. You can select it as a source for the update manager you are configuring. Then you can move the address that you want to be the primary one to the top of the list, using the Move up and Move down buttons to the right of the list.

6.1.5 Select which software to download

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an update manager. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

You need to select the subscriptions that the update manager will keep up to date.

1. If you are in the Endpoints view, click the Update managers button on the toolbar to display the Update managers view.

2. In the list of update managers, select the update manager for which you want to select the software to download. Right-click and click View/Edit configuration.

3. In the Configure update manager dialog box, on the Subscriptions tab, select a software subscription in the list of available subscriptions.

To view the details of the subscription, for example, what software is included in the subscription, click View details.

4. To move the selected subscription to the “Subscribed to” list, click the “Add” button.

To move all subscriptions to the “Subscribed to” list, click the “Add all” button.

6.1.6 Specify where the software is placed

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an update manager. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

After you have selected which software to download, you can specify where it should be placed on the network. By default, the software is placed in a UNC share

\\<ComputerName>\SophosUpdate

, where ComputerName is the name of the computer where the update manager is installed.

You can distribute downloaded software to additional shares on your network. To do this, add an existing network share to the list of available shares and then move it to the list of update shares

Help as described below. Ensure that the Update Manager user account (SophosUpdateMgr) has read rights to the shares.

Note: You created the Update Manager user account before you installed Enterprise Console.

For more information about the account, see Enterprise Console startup documentation.

For a list of platforms on which network shares are supported, see On what platforms are network shares supported?

(page 67)

To specify where the software is placed:

1. If you are in the Endpoints view, click the Update managers button on the toolbar to display the Update managers view.

2. In the list of update managers, select the update manager for which you want to select network shares for distributing the software. Right-click and click View/Edit configuration.

3. In the Configure update manager dialog box, on the Distribution tab, select a software subscription from the list.

4. Select a share from the “Available” shares list and move it to the “Update to” list by clicking the “Add” button (>).

The default share

\\<ComputerName>\SophosUpdate

is always present in the “Update to” list. You cannot remove this share from the list.

The “Available” shares list includes all the shares that Enterprise Console knows about and that are not already being used by another update manager.

You can add an existing share to or remove a share from the “Available” shares list, using the

“Add” button (>) or “Remove” button (<).

5. If you want to enter a description for a share or credentials needed to write to the share, select the share and click Configure. In the Share Manager dialog box, enter the description and credentials.

If you want to enter the same credentials for multiple shares, select the shares in the “Update to” list and click Configure. In the Configure multiple shares dialog box, enter credentials that will be used to write to the shares.

6.1.7 On what platforms are network shares supported?

Network shares on the following platforms are supported:

■

Shares on Windows NT and later.

■

Samba shares hosted on a Linux server, for example, SUSE Linux Enterprise 10 (SLES 10).

Samba shares hosted on Netware 5.1 SP3 and Netware 6.5 SP3 to SP7, Netware kernel.

■

Samba shares hosted on Mac OSX 10.2 or later.

Samba shares hosted on Unix.

Novell Storage Services (NSS) shares, supporting NDS authentication, hosted on Novell Open

Enterprise Server 1 and 2, Linux kernel.

Netware File System (NFS) shares, supporting NDS authentication, hosted on Netware 5.1

SP3 and Netware 6.5 SP3 to SP7, Netware kernel.

NetApp filers.

Sophos Enterprise Console

■

Samba shares hosted on Novell Open Enterprise Server 1 and 2.

Novell Storage Services (NSS) shares, supporting NDS authentication, hosted on Netware

5.1 SP3 and Netware 6.5 SP3 to SP7, Netware kernel.

6.1.8 Create or edit an update schedule

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an update manager. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

By default, an update manager checks the Sophos databank for threat detection data updates every 10 minutes.

You can change this update interval. The minimum is 5 minutes and the maximum 1440 minutes

(24 hours). We recommend an update interval of 10 minutes for threat detection data, so that you receive protection from new threats promptly after the detection data is published by Sophos.

By default, an update manager checks the Sophos databank for software updates every 60 minutes.

You can change this update interval. The minimum is 10 minutes and the maximum 1440 minutes

(24 hours).

For software updates, you can either specify an update interval that is used every hour of every day, or you can create more sophisticated schedules, in which each day can be specified independently and each day can be divided into periods with different update intervals.

Note: You can create a different schedule for each day of the week. Only a single schedule can be associated with a day of the week.

1. If you are in the Endpoints view, click the Update managers button on the toolbar to display the Update managers view.

2. In the list of update managers, select the update manager for which you want to create an update schedule. Right-click and click View/Edit configuration.

3. In the Configure update manager dialog box, on the Schedule tab, enter the interval between threat detection data updates.

4. Enter the interval between software updates.

■

If you want to specify an update interval that is used every hour of every day, select the

Check for updates every n minutes option and enter the interval in minutes.

If you want to create a more sophisticated schedule, or different schedules for different days of the week, select the Set up and manage scheduled updates option and click

Add.

In the Update schedule dialog box, enter a name for the schedule, select the days of the week, and update intervals.

6.1.9 Configure the update manager log

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an update manager. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

1. If you are in the Endpoints view, click the Update managers button on the toolbar to display the Update managers view.

Help

2. In the list of update managers, select the update manager for which you want to configure the log. Right-click and click View/Edit configuration.

3. In the Configure update manager dialog box, on the Logging tab, select the number of days you want to keep the log for and the log's maximum size.

6.1.10 Configure the self-updating of an update manager

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an update manager. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

1. If you are in the Endpoints view, click the Update managers button on the toolbar to display the Update managers view.

2. In the list of update managers, select the update manager for which you want to configure self-updating. Right-click and click View/Edit configuration.

3. In the Configure update manager dialog box, on the Advanced tab, select an update manager version you want to keep up to date with.

For example, if you select “recommended”, the update manager will always be upgraded to the version that is labeled as such at Sophos. The actual update manager version will change.

6.1.11 Make an update manager check for updates immediately

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Remediation - updating and scanning

right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

After you have configured an update manager, it checks for updates and downloads them from its update source to the update shares it maintains automatically, according to the specified schedule. If you want an update manager to check for and download threat detection data updates, software updates for endpoint computers and software updates for the update manager itself immediately, follow these steps:

1. If you are in the Endpoints view, click the Update managers button on the toolbar to display the Update managers view.

2. In the list of update managers, select the update manager which you want to update. Right-click and click Update Now.

6.1.12 Make an update manager comply with the configuration settings

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Remediation - updating and scanning

right to perform this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

1. If you are in the Endpoints view, click the Update managers button on the toolbar to display the Update managers view.

2. In the list of update managers, select the update manager which you want to comply with the configuration settings. Right-click and click Comply with Configuration.

Sophos Enterprise Console

6.1.13 Add an additional update manager

Sophos Update Manager (SUM) is always installed on the computer where you install Enterprise

Console. If you selected Custom Setup during the installation, this is the computer where the management server is installed.

You can add one or more additional update managers to your network. You may want to do this to reduce the load on the update manager that is already installed and distribute updates more efficiently. You can install an additional update manager on a computer that does not yet have an update manager installed.

Important: Do not remove the update manager installed on the same computer as the Enterprise

Console management server. Enterprise Console cannot protect the network fully until this update manager is configured with an update source. This will enable Enterprise Console to receive necessary updates (for example, information about the versions of security software that endpoint computers should be running, new and updated Content Control Lists for data control, or the list of new controlled devices and applications).

To enable an additional update manager to download security software from Sophos or another update manager via HTTP, open TCP port 80 (outbound) on the computer on which you want to install the additional update manager. To enable the update manager to download security software from another update manager via a UNC path, open the following outbound ports on the computer:

UDP port 137, UDP port 138, TCP port 139, and TCP port 445.

If the computer is running a version of Windows that includes the Network Discovery feature, and the feature is turned off, turn it on and restart the computer.

If User Account Control (UAC) is enabled on the computer, turn off UAC and restart the computer.

You can turn UAC on again after you have installed the update manager and subscribed to Sophos updates.

If the computer is in a domain, log on as a domain administrator.

If the computer is in a workgroup, log on as a local administrator.

The update manager installer is located on the computer where Enterprise Console management server is installed, in the shared folder

\\Servername\SUMInstallSet

. To view the location of the installer, go to the View menu and click Sophos Update Manager Installer Location.

You can install Sophos Update Manager using Windows Remote Desktop.

To install an additional update manager:

1. Run the Sophos Update Manager installer Setup.exe.

An installation wizard is launched.

2. On the Welcome page of the wizard, click Next.

3. On the License Agreement page, read the license agreement and click I accept the terms

in the license agreement if you agree to the terms. Click Next.

4. On the Destination folder page, accept the default or click Change and enter a new destination folder. Click Next.

Help

5. On the Sophos Update Manager Account page, select an account that endpoint computers will use to access the default update share created by the update manager. (The default update share is

\\<ComputerName>\SophosUpdate

, where ComputerName is the name of the computer where the update manager is installed.) This account must have read rights to the share and does not need to have administrative rights.

You can select the default user, select an existing user, or create a new user.

By default, the installer will create the SophosUpdateMgr account with read rights to the default update share and no interactive logon rights.

If you want to add more update shares later, select an existing account or create a new account that has read rights to those shares. Otherwise, ensure that the SophosUpdateMgr account has read rights to the shares.

6. On the Sophos Update Manager Account Details page, depending on the option you selected on the previous page, enter a password for the default user, details for the new user, or select an existing account.

The password for the account must comply with your password policy.

7. On the Ready to Install the Program page, click Install.

8. When installation is complete, click Finish.

The computer where you installed Sophos Update Manager should now appear in Enterprise

Console, Update managers view. (On the View menu, click Update Managers.)

To configure the update manager, select it, right-click, and then click View/Edit Configuration.

6.1.14 Publish security software on a web server

You might want to publish Sophos security software on a web server for computers to access via

HTTP. If you want to install Sophos Anti-Virus for UNIX, version 4, you must do this, although you can leave this until you have downloaded Sophos Anti-Virus for UNIX, version 4 if you want to.

To publish security software on a web server:

1. To find out the path of the shared folder to which the security software has been downloaded, known as the bootstrap location: a) In Enterprise Console, on the View menu, click Bootstrap Locations.

In the Bootstrap Locations dialog box, the Location column displays the bootstrap location for each platform.

b) Make a note of the path up to but not including the

CIDs

folder. For example:

\\server name\SophosUpdate

2. Make the bootstrap location, including subfolders, available on the web server.

Sophos Enterprise Console

3. Specify usernames and passwords to prevent unauthorized access to this folder on the web server.

The Sophos AutoUpdate component of Sophos Endpoint Security and Control supports the following HTTP authentication types:

■

Basic

NTLM (v1 and v2)

■

Digest (AutoUpdate may fail to update with digest authentication on some web servers)

Sophos recommends that you use a secure option (i.e. NTLM v2) when configuring your company's website for Sophos updating.

The documentation for your web server should describe how to share a folder over the web and how to set up usernames and passwords for it. For more information about how to do this, contact your web server vendor.

Using Internet Information Services (IIS) with Sophos software

If you use Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0, which is supplied with Windows 2003 or later, only files with extensions registered in the IIS MIME types list will be served. To ensure that IIS serves Sophos files, add each extension used by those files to the list (alternatively use a wildcard

'.*'). To do this, find the top-level Sophos directory, right-click and then click Properties. In the

Web Site Properties dialog box, click the HTTP Headers tab. Then select MIME types and add the extensions, mapping them to the MIME type "application/octet-stream".

If you use IIS with anonymous authentication and you want to use the web server as the primary update server in your updating policy, you will still need to enter credentials for the primary server in the updating policy. Otherwise, you will not be able to protect endpoint computers from the

console. See Change primary server credentials

(page 79).

6.2 Configuring software subscriptions

6.2.1 About software subscriptions

A software subscription specifies which versions of endpoint software are downloaded from

Sophos for each platform.

The Download Security Software Wizard sets up a default subscription called “Recommended.”

This subscription includes the recommended versions of any selected software.

If you want to add software to your subscription or subscribe to a version other than the

(page 74).

If you haven't completed the wizard after you installed Enterprise Console, see

Run the Download

Security Software Wizard

(page 76).

6.2.2 What types of updating are available?

For each platform (for example, Windows 2000 or later), there are several software packages representing different types of updating and containing different versions of endpoint software.

Help

You can choose which software package to download from Sophos for further deployment to endpoint computers by selecting one of the following updating types in the subscription.

Updating type

Recommended

Preview

Description

This is the default package. If you use this package, Sophos updates your software regularly (usually every month) with:

Fixes for issues discovered by customers.

New features that are ready for general availability.

If you install Enterprise Console for the first time and accept the default settings, this is the version that you will be on.

This package is aimed at IT and security administrators.

If you use this version, you receive new features before they are released in the

Recommended version. This means that you can test and evaluate them, perhaps on a test network, before they become generally available.

Note: Sometimes the Preview package gives you the same software as

Recommended. This happens when no new features are ready to be tested in customer environments.

Extended

Previous

Recommended

The Extended version is aimed at customers who have a strict or conservative process for installing updated software on their network.

If you use this version, you receive the same updates as the Recommended channel but with a delay of several months. This means that any issues in the product have been identified and fixed long before it is installed on your network.

The previous version of the currently recommended package.

This version can be useful for you if you want a little longer to test new software before you roll it out to your network.

Previous Extended

The previous version of the current extended package.

This version can be useful for you if you want a little longer to test new software before you roll it out to your network.

Note: We may change the packages over time. For more information about currently available software packages, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/119216.aspx

The Download Security Software Wizard sets up a subscription that specifies the recommended versions of any selected software.

The actual versions downloaded will usually change each month. To check what actual software versions are downloaded, in the Software Subscription dialog box, select the package you want to check and click Details.

Sophos Enterprise Console

6.2.3 Legacy updating types

Fixed versions

If in an earlier version of Enterprise Console you were subscribed to a fixed software version and didn't change your software subscription before upgrading, you will still be subscribed to the fixed version and it will continue to be downloaded.

A fixed version is a version that is updated with new threat detection data, but not with the latest software version each month. An example of a fixed version of Sophos Endpoint Security and

Control for Windows is "10.2.3 VDL4.85G". It consists of a three-part version identifier—major release identifier (10), minor release identifier (2), and maintenance release identifier (3)—and threat detection engine and data version (VDL4.85G).

If you are subscribed to a fixed software version, we recommend that, to ensure best protection, you change your subscription to a "recommended" package. For more information about software packages, see

What types of updating are available?

(page 72).

Important: The option Automatically upgrade fixed version software when it is no longer

supported by Sophos is always enabled in Enterprise Console 5.2.1 and later and you cannot disable it. If you didn't have this option enabled in your software subscription before the upgrade, the option has been automatically enabled during the upgrade and the check box is no longer displayed.

Fixed versions are downloaded for as long as they are available from Sophos. If a fixed version is due to retire, you will see an alert in the Update managers view next to any update managers that are subscribed to that version. If email alerting is active, the administrator will also receive an email alert.

When a subscribed fixed version is retired, Enterprise Console will redefine the subscription to use the oldest fixed version that is still available.

When you unsubscribe from a fixed software version, it will disappear from the list of available packages in the Software Subscription dialog box.

For more information about legacy software packages, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/112580.aspx

6.2.4 Subscribe to security software

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - updating right to edit a software subscription.

■

You cannot edit a subscription if it is applied to an updating policy that is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information about role-based administration, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

To subscribe to security software:

1. On the View menu, click Update Managers.

Help

2. In the Software Subscriptions pane, double-click the subscription you want to change, or click the Add button at the top of the pane to create a new subscription.

The Software Subscription dialog box appears.

Alternatively, if you want to create a copy of an existing subscription, select the subscription, right-click and click Duplicate Subscription. Type a new name for the subscription and then double-click it to open the Software Subscription dialog box.

3. In the Software Subscription dialog box, edit the name of the subscription, if you wish.

4. Select the platforms for which you want to download the software.

Important: If you want to download Sophos Anti-Virus for NetWare, please read Sophos support knowledgebase article 59192

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/59192.aspx

5. By default, you are subscribed to a "Recommended" package.You can also select a non-default package (for example, if you want to preview new features). To do so, click in the Version field next to the platform you want to change the package for and then click again. In the drop-down list of available versions, select the version you want to download (for example,

"Preview").

To learn what other packages are available, see

What types of updating are available?

(page

72)

After you have subscribed to the security software, you can set up subscription email alerts. For

more information about subscription email alerts, see Set up software subscription alerts (page

186).

If you created a new software subscription, configure the update manager to maintain it as described in

View or edit update manager configuration

(page 64).

6.2.5 Subscribe to encryption software

Note: We recommend that you create a new subscription for encryption. To update encryption software, use the protect computers wizard. For information, see

Install encryption software automatically

(page 53).

To subscribe to the encryption software:

1. In Enterprise Console, on the View menu, click Update Managers.

2. To create a new subscription, in the Software Subscriptions pane, click Add at the top of the pane. In the Software Subscription dialog box, type a name for the subscription in the

Subscription name box. Under Encryption Products, next to Windows XP and above, click in the Version box, and select 5.61 Recommended. Click OK.

3. To add the subscription to the Update Managers, in the Update managers pane, right-click the update manager and select View/Edit configuration. In the Configure update manager dialog box, on the Subscriptions tab, select the subscription in the Available list and click the > button to move it to the Subscribed to list. Click OK.

The encryption software is downloaded to the default share

\\<server_name>\SophosUpdate\CIDs\<subscription>\ENCRYPTION.

Note: You cannot have the encryption software installed by applying update polices to a group of computers. To install and update encryption software, use the protect computers wizard. For

information, see Install encryption software automatically (page 53).

Sophos Enterprise Console

6.2.6 Run the Download Security Software Wizard

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Policy setting - updating right to run

the Download Security Software Wizard. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

If you haven't completed the Download Security Software Wizard after you installed Enterprise

Console, do the following:

■

On the Actions menu, click Run the Download Security Software Wizard.

The Download Security Software Wizard guides you through selecting and downloading software.

Note: After you have successfully completed the wizard, the Run the Download Security

Software Wizard option will disappear from the Actions menu.

6.2.7 See which updating policies use the software subscription

To see which updating polices use a particular software subscription:

■

Select the subscription, right-click and then click View Subscription Usage.

In the Software Subscription Usage dialog box, you see a list of updating polices that use the subscription.

6.3 Configuring the updating policy

6.3.1 About updating policy

Updating policies enable you to keep your computers up to date with your chosen security software.

Enterprise Console checks for updates and updates computers, if necessary, at a specified interval.

The default updating policy enables you to install and update the software specified in the

“Recommended” subscription.

If you want to change the default updating policy or create a new updating policy, follow the instructions in the following topics:

■

Select a subscription

(page 77)

About update server locations

(page 77)

Schedule updates (page 81)

Select a different source for initial installation (page 81)

■

Log updates

(page 82)

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an updating policy.

Help

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information about role-based administration, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

6.3.2 Select a subscription

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an updating policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

A subscription specifies which versions of endpoint software are downloaded from Sophos for each platform. The default subscription includes the latest software for Windows 2000 and later.

To select a subscription:

1. Check which updating policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Updating. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Updating policy dialog box, click the Subscription tab and select the subscription for the software you want to keep up to date.

6.3.3 Configuring update server locations

6.3.3.1 About update server locations

By default, computers update from a single primary source UNC share,

\\<ComputerName>\SophosUpdate

, where

is the name of the Update

Manager's computer. You can also specify an alternative secondary source for updates and enable location roaming. If endpoint computers cannot contact their primary source, they attempt to update from their secondary source (if one has been specified). We recommend that you always specify a secondary source.

Both primary and secondary update server locations may be either UNC shares or HTTP URLs from any accessible Update Manager on your network. The secondary update server location may alternatively be set to get updates directly from Sophos over the internet via HTTP.

Note: Update Managers may have multiple distribution shares available, depending on how you have set them up.

6.3.3.2 Location roaming

6.3.3.2.1 About location roaming for laptops

Some laptop users may roam extensively or internationally within an organization. When location roaming is enabled (on an updating policy for roaming laptops), roaming laptops attempt to locate and update from the nearest update server location by querying other (fixed) endpoints on the local network they are connected to, minimizing update delays and bandwidth costs.

Sophos Enterprise Console

A roaming laptop gets update server locations and credentials by querying fixed computers on the same local network. If multiple locations are returned, the laptop determines which is nearest and uses that. If none work, the laptop uses the primary (then secondary) location(s) defined in its updating policy.

Note: When fixed computers send update locations and credentials to the laptop, passwords are obscured both in transmission and storage. However, accounts set up for endpoints to read update server locations should always be as restrictive as possible, allowing only read-only access.

See Specify where the software is placed (page 66).

If you want to know in more detail how location roaming works, see

How does location roaming work?

(page 78)

Location roaming is only usable where:

■

There is a single common Enterprise Console for both roaming and fixed endpoints.

■

The fixed endpoints use the same software subscription as the roaming laptops.

There is a primary update location specified in the updating policy used by the roaming laptops.

■

Enterprise Console is version 4.7 or later and Endpoint Security and Control is version 9.7 or later on both fixed and roaming endpoints.

Any third-party firewalls are configured to allow update location queries and responses. The port used is normally UDP port 51235 but is configurable; for details see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/110371.aspx

You enable location roaming as part of specifying sources for updates. Location roaming should only be enabled on groups of machines that frequently move from office to office. For information

on how to enable location roaming, see Change primary server credentials

(page 79).

For frequently asked questions about location roaming, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/112830.aspx

6.3.3.2.2 How does location roaming work?

Location roaming is a method of intelligent updating for roaming laptops where updates are performed from a ''best'' update location and updating does not rely solely on the primary and secondary update locations specified in the laptops' updating policy.

When location roaming is enabled, the following happens:

1. When a laptop changes its location, the Sophos AutoUpdate component of Endpoint Security and Control installed on the laptop determines that the MAC address of the default gateway on the connected network has changed since the last update. It then sends an ICMP broadcast over the local subnet to neighboring AutoUpdate installations, using UDP port 51235 by default.

2. The neighboring AutoUpdate installations reply with their updating policy, using the same port.

Only the primary update location is sent in the response.

All Endpoint Security and Control 9.7 or later installations listen for broadcasts regardless of whether location roaming is enabled or not.

Sensitive information in replies is obfuscated and fields are hashed for integrity.

Reply messages have a randomized reply time, to avoid message storms. The replies are also ICMP broadcasts, so any other machine that would have replied with the same details will also receive the broadcast and know not to respond.

Help

3. AutoUpdate chooses the "best" location from the locations received and checks whether the sender is managed by the same Enterprise Console and the subscription ID matches the one used by AutoUpdate on the laptop.

The "best" update location is determined based on the amount of hops required to access the update location.

4. An update is then attempted and, if successful, the location is cached.

A maximum of four accessible update locations with the same subscription ID and the lowest hop count are stored on the laptop (in the file iustatus.xml

in the following location:

C:\Program Files\Sophos\AutoUpdate\data\status\iustatus.xml

These update locations are checked every time AutoUpdate performs an update.

Note: If you need to revert back to using the primary and secondary update locations specified in the updating policy (for example, if you wish to roll out customizations from the update location specified in the policy), you will need to disable location roaming.

6.3.3.2.3 Enable location roaming

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an updating policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You should only enable location roaming on groups of machines that frequently move from office to office.

To enable location roaming:

1. In the Policies pane, double-click Updating. Then double-click the updating policy you want to change.

2. In the Updating Policy dialog box, on the Primary Server tab, select the Allow location

roaming check box.

3. In the Groups pane, select a group that uses the updating policy you just changed. Right-click and select Comply with, Group updating policy.

Repeat this step for each group that uses this updating policy.

Note: If you later need to revert back to using the primary and secondary update locations specified in the updating policy, disable location roaming.

6.3.3.3 Change primary server credentials

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an updating policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To change the primary server credentials:

1. In the Policies pane, double-click Updating. Then double-click the updating policy you want to change.

Sophos Enterprise Console

2. In the Updating Policy dialog box, on the Primary Server tab, enter new credentials that will be used to access the server. Change other details, if appropriate.

Note: If your primary update source is a folder on your website and you are using Internet

Information Services (IIS) with anonymous authentication, you will still need to enter credentials on the Primary Server tab. Use the credentials for the "initial install source" UNC share, even if you don't need them to access the webserver. If you leave the Username and Password fields on the Primary Server tab blank, you will not be able to protect endpoint computers from the console.

3. In the Groups pane, select a group that uses the updating policy you just changed. Right-click and select Comply with, Group updating policy.

Repeat this step for each group that uses this updating policy.

6.3.3.4 Set the secondary update server location

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an updating policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To set the secondary update server location:

1. Check which updating policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Updating, then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Updating Policy dialog box, click the Secondary Server tab, and then select the

Specify secondary server details check box.

4. In the Address (HTTP or UNC) box, do one of the following:

■

Enter the HTTP URL or UNC network path of the update server share.

Select Sophos.

Important: If you choose an HTTP URL or a share that is not maintained by a managed

Update Manager, Enterprise Console cannot check that the specified software subscription is available. You must manually ensure that the share contains the specified software subscription, otherwise computers will not be updated.

5. If the policy includes Mac endpoints and you specified a UNC path in the Address field, under

Select a file-sharing protocol for Mac OS X, select a protocol for Macs to access the update share.

6. If necessary, in the Username field, enter the username for the account that will be used to access the server, and then enter and confirm the password. For Sophos HTTP, this is your subscription credentials.

This account should have only read-only (browsing) access rights to the share you entered in the address field above.

Note: If the username needs to be qualified to indicate the domain, use the form domain\username. For information about how to check a Windows user account, see Sophos support knowledgebase article 11637

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/11637.aspx

Help

7. To throttle bandwidth, click Advanced. In the Advanced settings dialog box, select the Limit

amount of bandwidth used check box, and then use the slider control to specify the maximum bandwidth in Kbits/second.

8. If you access the update source via a proxy server, click Proxy details. In the Proxy details dialog box, select the Access the server via a proxy check box, and then enter the proxy server Address and Port number. Enter a Username and Password that give access to the proxy server. If the username needs to be qualified to indicate the domain, use the form domain\username.

Note: Some internet service providers require HTTP requests to be sent to a proxy server.

9. Click OK to close the Updating Policy dialog box.

10. In the Groups pane, right-click a group that uses the updating policy you just changed, and then click Comply with > Group Updating Policy.

Repeat this step for each group that uses this updating policy.

6.3.4 Schedule updates

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an updating policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

By default, endpoint computers check for updates in the network share every 5 minutes.

Note: If the computers download updates directly from Sophos, this update interval does not apply. Computers running Sophos PureMessage can check for updates every 15 minutes.

Computers that are not running Sophos PureMessage will update every 60 minutes.

To specify the update interval:

1. Check which updating policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Updating. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Updating policy dialog box, on the Schedule tab, leave Enable networked computers

to use Sophos updates automatically selected. Enter the interval between software updates

(in minutes).

4. If the computers update via a dial-up connection to the internet, select Check for updates on

dial-up.

Computers will then attempt to update whenever they connect to the internet.

6.3.5 Select a different source for initial installation

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an updating policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Sophos Enterprise Console

By default, security software is installed on computers and then kept updated from the source specified on the Primary server tab. You can specify a different source for initial installation.

Note:

This setting applies only to Windows 2000 and later.

If your primary server is an HTTP (web) address, and you want to perform installation on the computers from the console, you must specify a first-time install source.

To make the initial installation from a different source:

1. Check which updating policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Updating. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Updating policy dialog box, on the Initial install source tab, clear the Use primary

server address check box. Then enter the address of the source you want to use.

6.3.6 Log updates

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - updating right to configure an updating policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

By default, computers log their updating activity. The default maximum log size is 1 MB. The default log level is normal.

To change the logging settings:

1. Check which updating policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Updating. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Updating policy dialog box, on the Logging tab, leave Log Sophos AutoUpdate

activity selected. In the Maximum log size field, specify a maximum size for the log in MB.

4. In the Log level field, select Normal or Verbose logging.

Verbose logging provides information on many more activities than usual, so the log will grow faster. Use this setting only when detailed logging is needed for troubleshooting.

Help

6.4 Monitoring the update manager

6.4.1 Monitor update managers

Check the update manager status on the Dashboard

The status of the update managers is displayed in the Updates panel on the Dashboard. This will tell you when the last update was downloaded from Sophos and display a warning if the time since the last update exceeds the warning or critical threshold.

Note: The Updates section of the dashboard does not report an alert or error if an update manager is temporarily unable to update. Alerts and errors are only generated if the time since the last

update of the update manager exceeds the warning or critical threshold set in Configure the

Dashboard (page 56).

Check the update manager alerts and errors

Update manager alerts and errors are displayed in the Update managers view, Alerts and Errors columns, respectively.

If you subscribed to a fixed version of software, an alert will be displayed when that version is nearing retirement or is retired. An alert will also be displayed if your product license has changed.

To view update manager alerts and errors:

1. If you are in the Endpoints view, click the Update managers button on the toolbar to display the Update managers view.

2. In the list of update managers, look in the Alerts and Errors columns for any possible problems.

3. If there is an alert or error displayed next to an update manager, right-click that update manager and click View Update Manager Details.

In the Update manager details dialog box, you can see the time of the last threat detection data and software updates, status of the subscription or subscriptions that the update manager keeps up to date, and update manager status.

4. To learn more about a particular update manager status and for information on how to resolve it, follow the link in the Description column.

If you need to check or change your subscription, for example, if the product you are subscribed to is nearing retirement, or your product license has changed and the new license does not include

that product, see Subscribe to security software (page 74).

If new features become available as a result of a license change, you may need to configure new policies before you can use the features. You can find help with configuring the new policies in the Configuring policies section.

Subscribe to email alerts

You can set up email alerts to be sent to your chosen recipients when the product version you are subscribed to is nearing retirement or is retired, or when your Sophos product features change

Sophos Enterprise Console as a result of a license change. For more information, see

Set up software subscription alerts

(page 186).

6.4.2 Clear update manager alerts from the console

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Remediation - cleanup right to clear

alerts from the console. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

To clear update manager alerts from the console:

1. In the Update managers view, select the update manager(s) for which you want to clear alerts.

Right-click and select Acknowledge Alerts.

The Update manager alerts dialog box is displayed.

2. To clear alerts from the console, select the alerts you want to clear and click Acknowledge.

Acknowledged (cleared) alerts are no longer displayed in the console.

6.5 Update out-of-date computers

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Remediation - updating and scanning

right to update computers. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

After you have set up the updating policies and applied them to your networked computers, the computers are kept up to date automatically. You do not need to update computers manually unless there is a problem with updating.

If in the Endpoints view, in the computer list, you see a clock icon next to a computer in the Up

to date column on the Status tab, the computer has out-of-date security software. The text indicates how long the computer has been out of date.

A computer can be out of date for one of two reasons:

■

That computer has failed to fetch an update from the server.

■

The server itself does not have the latest Sophos software.

To diagnose the problem and update the computers:

1. In the Endpoints view, select the group that contains out-of-date computers.

2. On the Status tab, click the Up to date column heading to sort computers by up-to-dateness.

3. Click the Update details tab and look in the Primary server column.

This shows you the directory that each computer updates from.

4. Now look at the computers that update from one particular directory.

■

If some are out of date, but others are not, the problem is with individual computers. Select them, right-click and click Update Computers Now.

If all are out of date, the problem could be with the directory. On the View menu, click

Update Managers. Select the update manager that maintains the directory that you suspect to be out of date, right-click and click Update Now. Then on the View menu, click

Endpoints. Select the out-of-date computers, right-click and click Update Computers

Now.

Help

If you have several update managers and are not sure which one maintains the out-of-date directory, use the Updating Hierarchy report to see which shares are maintained by each update manager. To view the Updating Hierarchy report, on the Tools menu, click Manage

Reports. In the Report Manager dialog box, select Updating hierarchy and click Run. Look in the “Shares managed by update managers” section of the report.

Sophos Enterprise Console

7 Configuring policies

7.1 Configuring the anti-virus and HIPS policy

7.1.1 About the anti-virus and HIPS policy

An anti-virus and HIPS policy enables you to do the following:

■

Detect known and unknown viruses, Trojans, worms, and spyware automatically as soon as users attempt to copy, move, or open files that contain them.

■

Scan for adware and other potentially unwanted applications.

Scan computers for suspicious files and rootkits.

■

Automatically clean up computers as soon as a virus or other threat is found.

For information about changing the settings for automatic cleanup, see

Set up automatic cleanup for on-access scanning

(page 91).

■

Analyze the behavior of the programs running on the system.

For more information, see About behavior monitoring

(page 102).

■

Scan computers at set times.

For more information, see Create a scheduled scan

(page 95).

You can use different scanning settings for each group of computers. For detailed information about configuring scanning settings, see the following topics:

■

Configure on-access scanning (page 88)

Configure scanning settings for a scheduled scan

(page 96)

For information about scanning and cleanup options that do not take effect on Mac, Linux or UNIX, see

Settings not applicable on Mac, Linux or UNIX

(page 86).

7.1.2 Settings not applicable on Mac, Linux or UNIX

While all types of scan and cleanup on Windows computers can be fully managed from Enterprise

Console, there are a number of settings that do not take effect on Mac, Linux or UNIX computers.

Mac OS X

■

On Macs, scheduled scans are supported only by Sophos Anti-Virus version 8.0 or later.

For more information about anti-virus and HIPS policy settings that apply to Macs, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/118859.aspx

Help

Linux

The following automatic cleanup options do not apply to Linux computers and will be ignored by them.

Automatic cleanup options for on-access scanning:

■

Deny access and move to default location

■

Deny access and move to

Automatic cleanup options for scheduled scanning:

■

Move to default location

Move to

For more information about automatic cleanup settings, see Automatic cleanup settings for on-access scanning

(page 91) and

Automatic cleanup settings for scheduled scanning

(page

98).

For more information about anti-virus and HIPS policy settings that apply to Linux computers, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/117344.aspx

UNIX

■

Enterprise Console cannot perform on-access scans on UNIX computers.

You can configure scheduled scans, alerting, logging, and updating centrally from Enterprise

Console.

Note: These features also include some parameters that cannot be set using Enterprise

Console. You can set these parameters from the Sophos Anti-Virus command-line interface on each UNIX computer locally. Enterprise Console ignores them.

You can also configure on-demand scans from the Sophos Anti-Virus command-line interface on each UNIX computer locally.

For more information about setting additional parameters or configuring Sophos Anti-Virus for

UNIX locally, see the Sophos Anti-Virus for UNIX configuration guide. The guide is available at http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/documentation/sophos-anti-virus-for-unix.aspx

■

The following automatic cleanup options for scheduled scanning do not apply to UNIX computers and will be ignored by them.

■

Move to default location

Move to

For more information about automatic cleanup options for scheduled scanning, see

Automatic cleanup settings for scheduled scanning

(page 98).

For more information about anti-virus and HIPS policy settings that apply to UNIX computers, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/117344.aspx

Sophos Enterprise Console

7.1.3 On-access scanning

7.1.3.1 About on-access scanning best protection

This section contains recommendations to help you get the best from on-access scanning.

We recommend that you use the default on-access scan settings, as they represent the best balance between protecting your computer against threats and overall system performance. For information about the recommended on-access scan settings, see Sophos support knowledgebase article 114345 ( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/114345.aspx

7.1.3.2 Configure on-access scanning

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Caution: On-access scanning may not detect viruses if certain encryption software is installed.

Change the startup processes to ensure that files are decrypted when on-access scanning begins.

For more information on how to use anti-virus and HIPS policy with encryption software, see

Sophos support knowledgebase article 12790

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/12790.aspx

To configure on-access scanning:

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

4. In the On-access scanning panel, beside Enable on-access scanning, click Configure.

Help

5. To change when on-access scanning occurs, under Check files on, set the options as described below.

Description Option

Read

Scan files when they are copied, moved, or opened.

Scan programs when they are started.

Rename

Write

Scan files when they are renamed.

Scan files when they are saved or created.

6. Under Scan for, set the options as described below.

Description Option

Adware and PUAs

Adware displays advertising (for example, pop-up messages) that may affect user productivity and system efficiency.

PUAs (Potentially Unwanted Applications) are not malicious, but are generally considered unsuitable for business networks.

Suspicious files

Suspicious files display certain characteristics (for example, dynamic decompression code) that are commonly, but not exclusively, found in malware.

However, these characteristics are not sufficiently strong for the file to be identified as a new piece of malware.

Note: This option applies only to Sophos Endpoint

Security and Control for Windows 2000 and later.

Sophos Enterprise Console

7. Under Other scanning options, set the options as described below.

Option

Allow access to drives with infected boot sectors

Description

Allow access to an infected bootable removable medium or device such as a bootable CD, floppy disk, or USB flash drive.

Use this option only if advised to by Sophos technical support.

Scan inside archive files

Scan the contents of archives or compressed files before they are downloaded or emailed from managed computers.

We recommend that you leave this option turned

off, as it makes scanning significantly slower.

Users will still be protected against any threats in archives or compressed files, as any components of an archive or compressed file that may be malware will be blocked by on-access scanning:

When users open a file extracted from the archive file, the extracted file is scanned.

Files compressed with dynamic compression utilities such as PKLite, LZEXE, and Diet are scanned.

Scan system memory

Run an hourly background scan that detects malware hiding in the computer's system memory

(the memory that is used by the operating system).

7.1.3.3 Turn on-access scanning on or off

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

By default, Sophos Sophos Endpoint Security and Control scans files as the user attempts to access them, and denies access unless the file is clean.

You may decide to turn off on-access scanning on Exchange servers or other servers where performance might be affected. In this case, put the servers in a special group and change the anti-virus and HIPS policy used for that group as shown below.

To turn on-access scanning on or off:

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

Help

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS policy dialog box is displayed.

3. In the On-access scanning panel, select or clear the Enable on-access scanning check box.

Important: If you turn off on-access scanning on a server, we recommend that you set up scheduled scans on the relevant computers. For instructions on how to set up scheduled scans, see

Create a scheduled scan (page 95)

7.1.3.4 Set up automatic cleanup for on-access scanning

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

By default, Sophos Endpoint Security and Control automatically cleans up computers as soon as a virus or other threat is found. You can change the settings for automatic cleanup as described below.

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

4. In the On-access scanning panel, beside Enable on-access scanning, click Configure.

5. In the On-access scan settings dialog box, click the Cleanup tab.

6. Set the options as described in Automatic cleanup settings for on-access scanning (page 91).

7.1.3.5 Automatic cleanup settings for on-access scanning

Viruses/spyware

Select or clear the Automatically clean up items that contain a virus/spyware check box.

You can also specify what should be done with the items if cleanup fails:

■

Deny access only

Delete

■

Deny access and move to default location

Deny access and move to (enter a full UNC path)

Note: The Deny access and move to default location and Deny access and move to settings do not apply to Linux or UNIX computers and will be ignored by them.

Sophos Enterprise Console

Suspicious files

Note: These settings apply only to Windows computers.

You can specify what should be done with suspicious files when they are detected:

■

Deny access only

Delete

■

Deny access and move to default location

Deny access and move to (enter a full UNC path)

7.1.3.6 Specify on-access scanning file extensions

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can specify which file extensions are scanned during on-access scanning.

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

4. In the On-access scanning panel, beside Enable on-access scanning, click Configure.

Help

5. Click the Extensions tab, and then configure the options as described below.

Scan all files

Scan all files regardless of the filename extension.

If you turn on this option, the other options on the

Extensions tab are turned off.

Scanning all files will affect computer performance, so we recommend that you only turn on this option as part of a weekly scheduled scan.

Scan only executable and other vulnerable files

Check all files with executable file extensions

(for example, .exe, .bat, .pif) or files that have the possibility of being infected (for example,

.doc, .chm, .pdf).

Quickly check the structure of all files, and then scan them if their format is that of an executable file.

Additional file type extensions to be scanned

To scan additional file types, click Add, and then type a file extension such as

PDF

in the Extension box. You can use the wildcard ? to match any single character.

To stop scanning a file type, select its extension in the list, and then click Remove.

To change a file type, select its extension in the list, and then click Edit.

Scan files with no extension

Exclude

Files with no extension could be malware, so we recommend that you leave this option turned on.

To exclude specific file types from on-access scanning, click Add, and then type a file extension such as

PDF

in the Extension box.

To start scanning a file type, select its extension in the list, and then click Remove.

To change a file type, select its extension in the list, and then click Rename.

7.1.3.7 Exclude items from on-access scanning

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can exclude items from on-access scanning.

Sophos Enterprise Console

Note:

These options apply only to Windows, Mac OS X, and Linux.

Enterprise Console cannot perform on-access scans on UNIX computers.

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

3. In the On-access scanning panel, click the Configure button.

4. Click the tab for Windows Exclusions, Mac Exclusions, or Linux/UNIX Exclusions. To add items to the list, click Add and enter the full path in the Exclude Item dialog box.

The items you can exclude from scanning differ on each type of computer. See

Items that can be excluded from scanning (page 108).

To exclude files that are not stored on local drives, select the Exclude remote files check box. You might select this if you want to increase speed of access to such files and you trust the available remote file locations.

Important: If you select Exclude remote files on the Windows Exclusions tab, data control will not scan files uploaded or attached from a network location using a monitored application, for example, an email client, a web browser, or an instant messaging (IM) client. This is because data control uses the same set of exclusions as the Sophos Anti-Virus on-access scanner, so if remote file scanning is disabled, it will not send any remote files for a data control check. This restriction does not apply to storage device monitoring.

You can export the list of Windows exclusions to a file and then import it into another policy. For more information, see

Import or export on-access scanning exclusions (page 94).

7.1.3.8 Import or export on-access scanning exclusions

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can export the list of Windows exclusions for on-access scanning to a file, and then import it into another policy.

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

4. In the On-access scanning panel, beside Enable on-access scanning, click Configure.

Help

5. On the Windows Exclusions tab, click either Export or Import.

7.1.4 Scheduled scanning

7.1.4.1 Create a scheduled scan

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To have computers scanned by Sophos Endpoint Security and Control at set times, you can create a scheduled scan.

Note: On Mac computers, scheduled scans are supported only by Sophos Anti-Virus version 8.0

or later.

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

4. In the Scheduled scanning panel, click Add.

The Scheduled scan settings dialog box is displayed.

5. In the Scan name box, type a name for the scan.

6. Under What to scan, select the check boxes for items to scan. By default, all local hard disks and UNIX mounted filesystems are scanned.

7. Under When scan occurs, select the check boxes for the day(s) on which the scan should run.

8. To specify the time(s) when the scan will run, click Add.

■

To change a time, select it in the Times when the scan will run list, and then click Edit.

To delete a time, select it in the Times when the scan will run list, and then click Remove.

Note: If the scan detects components of a threat in memory, and you have not set up automatic cleanup for the scan, the scan stops and an alert is sent to Enterprise Console. This is because further scanning could enable the threat to spread. You must clean up the threat before running the scan again.

To change the scanning and cleanup settings, see the following topics:

■

Configure scanning settings for a scheduled scan

(page 96)

■

Set up automatic cleanup for scheduled scanning (page 97)

Sophos Enterprise Console

7.1.4.2 Configure scanning settings for a scheduled scan

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To configure the scanning settings for a scheduled scan:

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

4. In the Set up and manage scheduled scans list, select the scan, and then click Edit.

5. In the Scheduled scan settings dialog box, click Configure.

6. Under Scan files for, configure the settings as described below.

Description

Option

Adware and PUAs

Adware displays advertising (for example, pop-up messages) that may affect user productivity and system efficiency.

PUAs (Potentially Unwanted Applications) are not malicious, but are generally considered unsuitable for business networks.

Suspicious files

Rootkits

Suspicious files display certain characteristics (for example, dynamic decompression code) that are commonly, but not exclusively, found in malware.

However, these characteristics are not sufficiently strong for the file to be identified as a new piece of malware.

Note: This setting applies only to Sophos Endpoint

Security and Control for Windows.

A rootkit is a Trojan or technology that is used to hide the presence of a malicious object (process, file, registry key, or network port) from the computer user or administrator.

Help

7. Under Other scanning options, set the options as described below.

Option

Scan inside archive files

Description

Scan the contents of archives and other compressed files.

We don't recommend that you scan inside archive files during a scheduled scan, as it will add a significant amount of time to the scan. We recommend instead that you use on-access scanning (on-read and on-write) to protect your network. Any malware components of an unpacked archive will be blocked by the on-read and on-write scanners when they are accessed.

If you would like to scan all archives on a few computers using a scheduled scan, we recommend that you do the following:

Create an extra scheduled scan.

On the Scheduled scan extensions and

exclusions dialog box, add only the archive extensions to the list of extensions to be scanned.

Make sure that Scan all files is disabled.

This will allow you to scan the archive files whilst making the scan as short as possible.

Scan system memory

Run scan at lower priority

Detect malware hiding in the computer's system memory (the memory that is used by the operating system).

On Windows Vista and above, run the scheduled scan with lower priority so that it has minimal impact on user applications.

For detailed advice about adjusting the default scanning settings for a scheduled scan, see Sophos support knowledgebase article 63985

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/63985.aspx

7.1.4.3 Set up automatic cleanup for scheduled scanning

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Sophos Enterprise Console

By default, Sophos Endpoint Security and Control automatically cleans up computers as soon as a virus or other threat is found. You can change the settings for automatic cleanup as described below.

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

4. In the Scheduled scanning panel, select the scan, and then click Edit.

5. Beside Change scanning and cleanup settings, click Configure.

The Scanning and cleanup settings dialog box is displayed.

6. Click the Cleanup tab.

7. Set the options as described in Automatic cleanup settings for scheduled scanning (page 98).

7.1.4.4 Automatic cleanup settings for scheduled scanning

Viruses/spyware

Select or clear the Automatically clean up items that contain a virus/spyware check box.

You can also specify what should be done with the items if cleanup fails:

■

Log only

Delete

■

Move to default location

Move to (enter a full UNC path)

Notes

■

Moving an executable file reduces the likelihood of it being run.

You cannot automatically move a multi-component infection.

Adware and PUA

Select Automatically clean up adware and PUA.

Note

■

This setting applies only to Windows computers.

Suspicious files

You can specify what should be done with suspicious files when they are detected:

■

Log only

Help

■

Delete

Move to default location

■

Move to (enter a full UNC path)

Notes

■

These settings apply only to Windows computers.

Moving an executable file reduces the likelihood of it being run.

You cannot automatically move a multi-component infection.

7.1.4.5 Specify scheduled scanning file extensions

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can specify which file extensions are scanned during scheduled scanning.

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

4. Click Extensions and Exclusions.

The Scheduled scan extensions and exclusions dialog box is displayed.

Sophos Enterprise Console

5. On the Extensions tab, configure the options as described below.

Scan all files

Scan all files regardless of the filename extension.

If you turn on this option, the other options on the

Extensions tab are turned off.

Scanning all files will affect computer performance, so we recommend that you only turn on this option as part of a weekly scheduled scan.

Scan only executable and other vulnerable files

Check all files with executable file extensions

(for example, .exe, .bat, .pif) or files that have the possibility of being infected (for example,

.doc, .chm, .pdf).

Quickly check the structure of all files, and then scan them if their format is that of an executable file.

Additional file type extensions to be scanned

To scan additional file types, click Add, and then type a file extension such as

PDF

in the Extension box. You can use the wildcard ? to match any single character.

To stop scanning a file type, select its extension in the list, and then click Remove.

To change a file type, select its extension in the list, and then click Edit.

Scan files with no extension

Exclude

Files with no extension could be malware, so we recommend that you leave this option turned on.

To exclude specific file types from scheduled scanning, click Add, and then type a file extension such as

PDF

in the Extension box.

To start scanning a file type, select its extension in the list, and then click Remove.

To change a file type, select its extension in the list, and then click Rename.

For detailed advice about configuring the extension settings for scheduled scanning, see Sophos support knowledgebase article 63985

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/63985.aspx

7.1.4.6 Exclude items from scheduled scanning

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

100

Help

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can exclude items from scheduled scanning.

Note:

The “excluded items” settings for scheduled scans also apply to full system scans run from the

console and "scan my computer" scans run on networked computers. See Scan computers now

(page 62).

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. The Anti-virus and HIPS policy dialog box is displayed. In the Scheduled scanning panel, click Extensions and Exclusions.

4. Click the Windows Exclusions, Linux/UNIX Exclusions, or Mac Exclusions tab. To add items to the list, click Add and enter the full path in the Exclude item dialog box.

The items you can exclude from scanning differ on each type of computer. See

Items that can be excluded from scanning (page 108).

You can export the list of Windows exclusions to a file and then import it into another policy. For more information, see

Import or export scheduled scanning exclusions (page 101).

7.1.4.7 Import or export scheduled scanning exclusions

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can export the list of Windows exclusions for scheduled scanning to a file, and then import it into another policy.

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

4. In the Scheduled scanning panel, click Extensions and Exclusions.

5. On the Windows Exclusions tab, click either Export or Import.

101

Sophos Enterprise Console

7.1.5 Behavior monitoring

7.1.5.1 About behavior monitoring

As part of on-access scanning, Sophos Behavior Monitoring protects Windows computers from unidentified or "zero-day" threats and suspicious behavior.

Runtime detection can intercept threats that cannot be detected before execution. Behavior monitoring uses the following runtime detection methods to intercept threats:

■

Malicious and suspicious behavior detection

Buffer overflow detection

Malicious and suspicious behavior detection

Suspicious behavior detection uses Sophos’s Host Intrusion Prevention System (HIPS) to dynamically analyze the behavior of all programs running on the computer to detect and block activity that appears to be malicious. Suspicious behavior may include changes to the registry that could allow a virus to run automatically when the computer is restarted.

Suspicious behavior detection watches all system processes for signs of active malware, such as suspicious writes to the registry or file copy actions. It can be set to warn the administrator and/or block the process.

Malicious behavior detection dynamically analyses all programs running on the computer to detect and block activity that is known to be malicious.

Buffer overflow detection

Buffer overflow detection is important for dealing with zero-day exploits.

It dynamically analyzes the behavior of programs running on the system in order to detect when an attempt is made to exploit a running process using buffer overflow techniques. It will catch attacks targeting security vulnerabilities in both operating system software and applications.

7.1.5.2 Enable behavior monitoring

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS policy dialog box is displayed.

102

Help

4. In the On-access scanning panel, select the Enable behavior monitoring check box.

7.1.5.3 Detect malicious behavior

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Malicious behavior detection is the dynamic analysis of all programs running on the computer to detect and block activity that is known to be malicious.

To change the settings for detecting and reporting malicious behavior:

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS policy dialog box is displayed.

4. In the On-access scanning panel, select the Enable behavior monitoring check box.

5. Beside Enable behavior monitoring, click Configure

6. To alert the administrator and block malicious behavior, select the Detect malicious behavior check box.

7.1.5.4 Detect suspicious behavior

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To change the settings for detecting and reporting suspicious behavior:

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS policy dialog box is displayed.

4. In the On-access scanning panel, select the Enable behavior monitoring check box.

5. Beside Enable behavior monitoring, click Configure

103

Sophos Enterprise Console

6. Select the Detect malicious behavior check box.

7. To alert the administrator and block suspicious processes, select the Detect suspicious

behavior check box.

8. To alert the administrator, but not block suspicious processes, select the Alert only, do not

block suspicious behavior check box.

For the strongest protection, we advise you to enable suspicious file detection. See

Configure on-access scanning

(page 88).

7.1.5.5 Detect buffer overflows

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Buffer overflow detection dynamically analyzes the behavior of programs running on the system in order to detect when an attempt is made to exploit a running process using buffer overflow techniques.

To change the settings for detecting and reporting buffer overflow attacks:

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS policy dialog box is displayed.

4. In the On-access scanning panel, select the Enable behavior monitoring check box.

5. Beside Enable behavior monitoring, click Configure.

■

To alert the administrator and block buffer overflows, select the Detect buffer overflows check box and clear the Alert only, do not block check box.

To alert the administrator, but not block buffer overflows, select both the Detect buffer

overflows check box and the Alert only, do not block check box.

7.1.6 Sophos Live Protection

7.1.6.1 About Sophos Live Protection

Sophos Live Protection uses in-the-cloud technology to instantly decide whether a suspicious file is a threat and take action specified in the anti-virus and HIPS policy.

Live Protection improves detection of new malware without the risk of unwanted detections. This is achieved by doing an instant lookup against the very latest known malicious files. When new malware is identified, Sophos can send out updates within seconds.

104

Help

To take full advantage of Live Protection, you must ensure that the following options are enabled.

■

Enable Live Protection

If the anti-virus scan on an endpoint computer has identified a file as suspicious, but cannot further identify it as either clean or malicious based on the threat identity (IDE) files stored on the computer, certain file characteristics such as checksum are sent to Sophos to assist with further analysis. The in-the-cloud checking performs an instant lookup of a suspicious file in the SophosLabs database. If the file is identified as clean or malicious, the decision is sent back to the computer and the status of the file is automatically updated.

■

Automatically send file samples to Sophos

If a file is deemed potentially malicious but cannot be positively identified as malicious based on its characteristics alone, Live Protection allows Sophos to request a sample of the file. If this option is enabled and Sophos does not already hold a sample of the file, the file is submitted automatically.

Submission of such sample files helps Sophos to continuously enhance detection of malware without the risk of false positives.

Note: The maximum sample size is 10 MB. The timeout for sample upload is 30 seconds. It is not recommended to automatically send samples over a slow connection (less than 56

Kbps).

Important: You must ensure that Sophos domain to which the file data is sent is trusted in your web filtering solution. For details, see support knowledgebase article 62637

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/62637.aspx

If you use a Sophos web filtering solution, for example the WS1000 Web Appliance, you do not need to do anything - Sophos domains are already trusted.

7.1.6.2 Turn Sophos Live Protection on or off

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

By default, Endpoint Security and Control sends file data such as checksums to Sophos, but does not send sample files. To take full advantage of Sophos Live Protection, you must enable both

Sophos Live Protection options.

To turn Live Protection options on or off:

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Anti-virus and HIPS Policy dialog box, click the Sophos Live Protection button.

105

Sophos Enterprise Console

4. In the Sophos Live Protection dialog box:

■

To turn the sending of file data to Sophos on or off, select or clear the Enable Live

Protection check box.

To turn the sending of sample files to Sophos on or off, select or clear the Automatically

send file samples to Sophos check box.

Note: When a file sample is sent to Sophos for online scanning, the file data is always sent with the sample.

7.1.7 Web protection

7.1.7.1 About web protection

Web protection provides enhanced protection against web threats. It includes the following features:

■

Live URL filtering, which blocks access to websites that are known to host malware. This feature works by performing a real-time lookup against Sophos’s online database of infected websites.

Content scanning, which scans data and files downloaded from the internet (or intranet) and proactively detects malicious content. This feature scans content hosted at any locations, including those not listed in the database of infected websites.

Web protection is supported on the following web browsers: Internet Explorer, Firefox, Google

Chrome, Safari and Opera. Web content accessed via an unsupported browser is not filtered and will not be blocked.

When access to a malicious website is blocked, an event is logged that can be viewed in the Web

Event Viewer and in the Computer details of the endpoint computer where the event occurred.

If you use the Web Control feature, both web protection and web control events are displayed in the Web Event Viewer and Computer details. See

View web events (page 202) and

View latest web events on a computer (page 203).

By default, web protection is enabled. For information on how to turn web protection on or off, see

Turn web protection on or off

(page 106).

Note: If you want to have more control over which websites users are allowed to access, for example, if you wish to protect users from visiting websites for which your organization could be legally liable, use the Web Control feature. For more information, see

About the web control policy

(page 177).

7.1.7.2 Turn web protection on or off

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

106

Help

To turn web protection on or off:

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

4. In the Anti-virus and HIPS policy dialog box, next to Block access to malicious websites, select On or Off to enable or disable web protection. This option is enabled by default.

For information on how to authorize specific websites, see Authorize websites

(page 114).

5. To enable or disable scanning of data and files downloaded from the internet, next to Download

scanning, select On, As on access, or Off.

By default, As on access is selected, that is, download scanning is disabled or enabled simultaneously with on-access scanning.

7.1.8 Scanned file types and exclusions

7.1.8.1 About changing which file types are scanned

By default, Sophos Endpoint Security and Control scans file types that are vulnerable to viruses.

The file types that are scanned by default not only differ between operating systems, but also change as the product is updated.

To see a list of the file types that are scanned by default, go to a computer with the relevant operating system, open Sophos Endpoint Security and Control or Sophos Anti-Virus, and then look for the extensions configuration page.

You can also choose to scan additional file types or exempt some file types from scanning.

Windows

To see a list of the file types scanned by default on a Windows computer:

1. Open Sophos Endpoint Security and Control.

2. Under Anti-virus and HIPS, click Configure anti-virus and HIPS, and then click On-demand

extensions and exclusions.

For information about scanning additional file types or exempting some file types from scanning on a Windows computer, see the following topics:

■

Specify on-access scanning file extensions (page 92)

Specify scheduled scanning file extensions (page 99)

Mac OS X

Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac OS X scans all file extensions during on-access scanning. To change the settings for scheduled scanning, see

Specify scheduled scanning file extensions (page 99).

107

Sophos Enterprise Console

Linux or UNIX

To make changes on a Linux computer, use the

savconfig

and

savscan

commands as described in the Sophos Anti-Virus for Linux configuration guide.

To make changes on a UNIX computer, use the

savscan

command as described in the Sophos

Anti-Virus for UNIX configuration guide.

7.1.8.2 Items that can be excluded from scanning

On each type of computer, there are different limitations on the items that you can exclude from scanning.

Windows

On Windows, you can exclude drives, folders and files.

You can use the wildcards * and ?

The wildcard ? can be used only in a filename or extension. It generally matches any single character. However, when used at the end of a filename or extension, it matches any single character or no characters. For example file??.txt matches file.txt, file1.txt and file12.txt but not file123.txt.

The wildcard * can be used only in a filename or extension, in the form [filename].* or *.[extension].

For example, file*.txt, file.txt* and file.*txt are invalid.

For more information and examples, see

Specifying scanning exclusions for Windows

(page 109).

Mac OS X

On Mac OS X, you can exclude files, folders, and volumes.

You can specify which items are excluded by prefixing or suffixing the exclusion with a slash or suffixing the exclusion with a double slash.

For more information, see the Sophos Anti-Virus for Mac OS X Help.

Linux or UNIX

On Linux and UNIX, you can exclude directories and files.

You can specify any POSIX path, whether it is a file or a directory, for example, /folder/file. You may use the wildcards ? and *.

Note: Enterprise Console only supports path-based Linux and UNIX exclusions. You can also set up other types of exclusion directly on the managed computers. Then you can use regular expressions, exclude file types and filesystems. For information on how to do this, see the Sophos

Anti-Virus for Linux configuration guide or the Sophos Anti-Virus for UNIX configuration guide.

If you set up another path-based exclusion on a managed Linux or UNIX computer, this computer will be reported to the console as differing from the group policy.

108

Help

For information about excluding items from scanning, see the following topics:

■

Exclude items from on-access scanning

(page 93)

■

Exclude items from scheduled scanning

(page 100)

7.1.8.3 Specifying scanning exclusions for Windows

Standard naming conventions

Sophos Anti-Virus validates the paths and file names of scanning exclusion items against standard

Windows naming conventions. For example, a folder name may contain spaces but may not contain only spaces.

Exclude a specific file

Specify both the path and file name to exclude a specific file. The path can include a drive letter or network share name:

C:\Documents\CV.doc

\\Server\Users\Documents\CV.doc

Note: To make sure that exclusions are always applied correctly, add both the long and

8.3-compliant file and folder names:

C:\Program Files\Sophos\Sophos Anti-Virus

C:\Progra~1\Sophos\Sophos~1

For more information, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/13045.aspx

Exclude all files with the same name

Specify a file name without a path to exclude all files with that name wherever they are located in the file system: spacer.gif

Exclude everything on a drive or network share

Specify a drive letter or network share name to exclude everything on that drive or network share:

\\Server\<sharename>\

Note: When you specify a network share, remember to include the trailing slash.

Exclude a specific folder

Specify a folder path including a drive letter or network share name to exclude everything in that folder and below:

D:\Tools\logs

109

Sophos Enterprise Console

Exclude all folders with the same name

Specify a folder path without a drive letter or network share name to exclude everything from that folder and below on any drive or network share. For example,

\Tools\logs

excludes the following folders:

C:\Tools\logs

\\Server\Tools\logs

Note: You must specify the entire path up to the drive letter or network share name. In the example above, specifying

\logs

would not exclude any files.

The ? and * wildcards

Use the ? wildcard in a file name or extension to match any single character.

At the end of a file name or extension, the ? wildcard matches any single character or no characters: For example, file??.txt

matches file.txt

, file1.txt

, and file12.txt

, but not file123.txt

Use the * wildcard in a file name or extension, in the form

[file name].*

*.[extension]

Correct

file.*

*.txt

Incorrect

file*.txt

file.txt* file.*txt

Multiple file extensions

File names with multiple extensions are treated as if the last extension is the extension and the rest are part of the file name:

MySample.txt.doc

= file name

MySample.txt

+ extension

.doc

7.1.9 Authorizing items for use

7.1.9.1 Authorize adware and PUAs

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

110

Help

If you have enabled Sophos Endpoint Security and Control to detect adware and other potentially unwanted applications (PUAs), it may prevent the use of an application that you require.

To authorize an adware or PUA application:

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

4. Click Authorization.

The Authorization Manager dialog box is displayed.

5. On the Adware and PUAs tab, in the Known adware and PUAs list, select the application you want to authorize.

If you cannot see the application that you want to authorize, you can add it to the list of known

adware and PUAs yourself. For information on how to do this, see Pre-authorize adware and

PUAs (page 111).

6. Click Add.

The adware or PUA appears in the Authorized adware and PUAs list.

7.1.9.2 Pre-authorize adware and PUAs

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

If you want to allow an application to be used that Sophos Endpoint Security and Control has not yet classified as an adware or PUA, you can pre-authorize it by adding it to the list of authorized adware and PUAs yourself.

1. Go to the Sophos Adware and PUAs web page

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/threat-center/threat-analyses/adware-and-puas.aspx

2. Find, and then copy, the name of the application that you want to pre-authorize.

3. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

4. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

5. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

6. Click Authorization.

The Authorization Manager dialog box is displayed.

111

Sophos Enterprise Console

7. On the Adware and PUAs tab, click New entry.

8. In the Add New Adware or PUA dialog box, paste the application name that you copied in step 2.

The adware or PUA appears in the Authorized adware and PUAs list.

If you have made a mistake or simply want to remove an application from the Authorization

Manager, delete it from the list of known adware and PUAs:

1. In the Authorized adware and PUAs list, select the application.

2. Click Remove.

3. In the Known adware or PUAs list, select the application.

4. Click Delete entry.

7.1.9.3 Block authorized adware and PUAs

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To prevent currently-authorized adware and PUAs from running on computers:

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box, click the Authorization button.

4. On the Adware or PUAs tab, in the Authorized adware and PUAs list, select the application you want to block.

5. Click Remove.

7.1.9.4 Authorize suspicious items

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

If you have enabled one or more HIPS options (for example, suspicious behavior detection, buffer overflow detection, or suspicious file detection), but you want to use some of the items detected, you can authorize them as follows:

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

112

Help

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

4. Click Authorization.

The Authorization Manager dialog box is displayed.

5. Click the tab for the type of behavior that has been detected.

In this example, we'll use Buffer Overflow.

6. In the Known applications list, select the application you want to authorize.

If you cannot see the application you want to authorize, you can add it to the list of authorized applications yourself. For information on how to do this, see

Pre-authorize potentially suspicious items (page 113).

7. Click Add.

The suspicious application appears in the Authorized applications list.

7.1.9.5 Pre-authorize potentially suspicious items

If you want to allow the use of an application or file that Sophos Endpoint Security and Control has not yet classified as suspicious, you can pre-authorize it by adding it to the list of authorized items yourself.

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

4. Click Authorization.

The Authorization Manager dialog box is displayed.

5. Click the tab for the type of behavior that has been detected.

In this example, we'll use Buffer Overflow.

6. Click New entry.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

7. Browse to the application, and then double-click it.

The suspicious application appears in the Authorized applications list.

If you have made a mistake or simply want to remove an application from the Authorization

Manager, delete it from the list of known files:

1. In the Authorization Manager dialog box, click the tab for the type of behavior that has been detected.

In this example, we'll use Suspicious Files.

2. In the Authorized files list, select the file.

113

Sophos Enterprise Console

3. Click Remove.

4. In the Known files list, select the file.

5. Click Delete entry.

7.1.9.6 Authorize websites

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

If you want to authorize a website that Sophos has classified as malicious, you can add it to the list of authorized sites. Authorizing a website will prevent URLs from that website being verified with Sophos's online web filtering service.

Caution: Authorizing a website that Sophos has classified as malicious could expose your users to threats. Make sure that it is safe to visit the website before you authorize it.

To authorize a website:

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Anti-virus and HIPS.

3. Double-click the policy you want to change.

The Anti-Virus and HIPS Policy dialog box is displayed.

4. Click Authorization.

The Authorization Manager dialog box is displayed.

5. On the Websites tab, click Add.

■

To edit a website entry, select it in the Authorized websites list, and then click Edit.

■

To delete a website entry, select it in the Authorized websites list, and then click Remove.

The website appears in the Authorized websites list.

Notes

■

If you have download scanning enabled and your users visit a website that contains a threat, access to the site will be blocked even if it is listed as an authorized website.

If you use the web control feature, when you authorize a website that is blocked by your Web

control policy, the website will still be blocked. To allow access to the website, you will need to exempt it from web control filtering as well as authorize in the anti-virus and HIPS policy.

For more information about web control, see

About the web control policy

(page 177).

114

Help

7.2 Configuring the firewall policy

7.2.1 Basic firewall configuration

7.2.1.1 Set up a basic firewall policy

By default, the firewall is enabled and blocks all non-essential traffic. Therefore, you should configure it to allow the applications you want to use, and test it before installing it on all computers.

See the Sophos Enterprise Console policy setup guide for detailed advice.

For more information about the default firewall settings, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/57757.aspx

For information about preventing network bridging, see About device control (page 159).

Important: When you apply a new or updated policy to computers, applications that were allowed before may be blocked briefly until the new policy is fully applied. You should notify your users about this before you apply new policies.

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information about role-based administration, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

To set up a basic firewall policy:

1. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall.

2. Double-click the Default policy to edit it.

The Firewall Policy wizard appears. Follow the instructions on the screen. There is additional information on some of the options below.

3. On the Configure firewall page, select the type of location:

■

Select Single location for computers that are always on the network, for example, desktops.

Select Dual location if you want the firewall to use different settings according to the location where computers are used, for example, in the office (on the network) and out of office (off the network). You may want to set up dual location for laptops.

115

Sophos Enterprise Console

4. On the Operational mode page, select how the firewall will handle inbound and outbound traffic:

Description Mode

Block inbound and outbound traffic

Default level. Offers the highest security.

Only allows essential traffic through the firewall and authenticates the identity of applications using checksums.

To allow applications commonly used in your organization to communicate through the firewall, click Trust. For more information, see

About trusting applications (page 122).

Block inbound and allow outbound traffic

Offers a lower security level than Block

inbound and outbound traffic.

Allows your computers to access the network and internet without you having to create special rules.

All applications are allowed to communicate through the firewall.

Monitor

Applies to network traffic the rules that you have set up. If traffic has no matching rule, it is reported to the console, and only allowed if it is outbound.

Enables you to collect information about your network, and to then create suitable rules before deploying the firewall to your computers.

For more information, see About using monitor mode (page 116).

5. On the File and printer sharing page, select Allow file and printer sharing if you want to allow computers to share local printers and folders on the network.

After you have set up the firewall, you can view firewall events (for example, applications blocked by the firewall) in the Firewall - Event Viewer. For details, see

View firewall events (page 197).

The number of computers with events over a specified threshold within the last seven days is also displayed on the Dashboard.

7.2.1.2 About using monitor mode

You can enable monitor mode on test computers and use the Firewall Event Viewer to view which traffic, applications, and processes are being used.

You can then use the Event Viewer to create rules that allow or block reported traffic, applications, and processes, as described in

Create a firewall event rule (page 119).

116

Help

Note: When you create a rule using the Firewall Event Viewer and add it to the firewall policy, the firewall mode changes from Monitor to Custom.

If you do not want to allow unknown traffic by default, you can use interactive mode.

In interactive mode, the firewall prompts the user to allow or block any applications and traffic for

which it does not have a rule. For details, see About interactive mode

(page 121) and the other topics in the "Working in interactive mode" section.

7.2.1.3 Add and trust an application

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Trusted applications are allowed full and unconditional network access, including access to the internet.

To add an application to the firewall policy and trust it:

1. Check which firewall policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall, and then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. On the Operational mode page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Trust.

The Firewall Policy dialog box appears.

4. Click Add.

The Firewall policy - Add trusted application dialog box appears.

5. In the Search period field, click the drop-down arrow and select the period for which you want to display application events.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Within 24 hours, or select Custom and specify your own time period by selecting the starting and ending dates and times.

6. If you want to view application events of a certain type, in the Event type field, click the drop-down arrow and select the event type.

7. If you want to view application events for a certain file, in the File name field, enter the file name.

If you leave this field empty, application events for all files will be displayed.

You can use wildcards in this field. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters.

8. Click Search to display a list of application events.

9. Select an application event, and then click OK.

The application is added to the firewall policy and marked as Trusted.

117

Sophos Enterprise Console

7.2.1.4 Allow all traffic on a LAN

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To allow all traffic between computers on a LAN (Local Area Network):

1. Check which firewall policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall, and then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. On the File and printer sharing page of the Firewall Policy wizard, select Use custom

settings, and then click Custom.

4. In the LAN settings list, select the Trusted check box for a network.

Notes

■

If you allow all traffic between the computers on a LAN, you also allow file and printer sharing on it.

7.2.1.5 Allow file and printer sharing

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To allow computers to share local printers and folders on the network:

1. Check which firewall policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall, and then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. On the File and printer sharing page of the Firewall Policy wizard, select Allow file and

printer sharing.

7.2.1.6 Allow flexible control of file and printer sharing

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

118

Help

If you want more flexible control of file and printer sharing on your networks (for example, uni-directional NetBIOS traffic), you can do the following:

1. Allow file and printer sharing on other LANs (Local Area Networks) than those in the LAN

settings list. This allows NetBIOS traffic on those LANs to be processed by the firewall rules.

2. Create high-priority global rules which allow communication to/from hosts with the appropriate

NetBIOS ports and protocols. We recommend that you create global rules to explicitly block all unwanted file and printer sharing traffic rather than let it be handled by the default rule.

To allow file and printer sharing on other LANs than those in the LAN settings list:

1. Check which firewall policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall, and then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. On the File and printer sharing page of the Firewall Policy wizard, select Use custom

settings, and then click Custom.

4. Clear the Block file and printer sharing for other networks check box.

7.2.1.7 Block unwanted file and printer sharing

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To block file and printer sharing on LANs other than those specified in the LAN settings list on the LAN tab:

1. Check which firewall policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall, and then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. On the File and printer sharing page of the Firewall Policy wizard, select Use custom

settings, and then click Custom.

4. Select the Block file and printer sharing for other networks check box.

7.2.1.8 Create a firewall event rule

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can create rules for all firewall events except the “modified memory” events.

To create a firewall event rule:

1. On the Events menu, click Firewall Events.

119

Sophos Enterprise Console

2. In the Firewall - Event Viewer dialog box, select an event for the application you want to create a rule for and click Create Rule.

3. In the dialog box that appears, select an option that you want to apply to the application.

4. Select which location you want to apply the rule to (primary, secondary, or both). If you select to apply the rule to the secondary location or both locations, the rule will be added only to policies which have a secondary location configured. Click OK.

Note: The “new application” and “modified application” events are location independent (they add checksums which are shared between both locations). You cannot select a location for these events.

5. From the list of firewall policies, select a policy or policies which you want to apply the rule to.

Click OK.

Note: You cannot add a rule to a policy that is applied outside your active sub-estate.

Note: If you want to create an application rule directly from a firewall policy, using the advanced firewall policy configuration pages, see

Create an application rule from a firewall policy (page 134).

7.2.1.9 Temporarily disable the firewall

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

By default, the firewall is enabled. Occasionally, you may need to temporarily disable the firewall for maintenance or troubleshooting, and then re-enable it.

To turn the firewall off for a group of computers:

1. Check which firewall policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Firewall Policy wizard appears.

3. On the welcome page of the wizard, do one of the following:

■

If you want to turn the firewall off for all locations you have set up (primary location and secondary location, if you configured one), click Next. On the Configure firewall page, select Allow all traffic (the firewall is turned off). Complete the wizard.

If you want to turn the firewall off for one of the locations (primary or secondary), click the

Advanced firewall policy button. In the Firewall Policy dialog box that appears, select

Allow all traffic next to Primary location or Secondary location. Click OK. Complete the Firewall Policy wizard.

If you disable the firewall, your computers are unprotected until you re-enable it. To enable the firewall, clear the Allow all traffic check box.

120

Help

7.2.2 Advanced firewall configuration

7.2.2.1 Open the advanced configuration pages

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

If you want to have greater control over the firewall settings and the ability to fine-tune them, you can use the advanced firewall policy configuration pages to configure the firewall.

To open the advanced firewall configuration pages:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

7.2.2.2 Working in interactive mode

7.2.2.2.1 About interactive mode

In interactive mode, the firewall displays a learning dialog on the endpoint computer each time an unknown application or service requests network access. The learning dialog asks the user whether to allow or block the traffic, or whether to create a rule for that type of traffic.

7.2.2.2.2 Enable interactive mode

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

The firewall can work in interactive mode, asking the user how to deal with detected traffic. For more information, see

About interactive mode (page 121).

To put the firewall in interactive mode on a group of computers:

1. Check which firewall policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall, and then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

4. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location that you want to configure.

5. On the General tab, under Working mode, click Interactive.

121

Sophos Enterprise Console

7.2.2.2.3 Change to a non-interactive mode

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

There are two non-interactive modes:

■

Allow by default

Block by default

In the non-interactive modes, the firewall deals with network traffic automatically using your rules.

Network traffic which has no matching rule is either all allowed (if it is outbound) or all blocked.

To change to a non-interactive mode on a group of computers:

1. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall, and then double-click the policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location that you want to configure.

4. Click the General tab.

5. Under Working mode, click Allow by default or Block by default.

7.2.2.3 Configuring the firewall

7.2.2.3.1 About trusting applications

To help provide security for your computers, the firewall blocks traffic from unrecognised applications on your computers. However, applications commonly used in your organization may be blocked, thus preventing users from performing their everyday tasks.

You can trust these applications, so that they can communicate through the firewall. Trusted applications are allowed full and unconditional access to the network and the internet.

Note: For greater security, you can apply one or more application rules to specify the conditions

under which the application can run. For information on how to do this, see Create an application rule (page 133) and other topics in the section Application rules.

7.2.2.3.2 Add an application to a firewall policy

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To add an application to a firewall policy:

1. Check which firewall policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall, and then double-click the policy you want to change.

122

Help

3. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

4. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location that you want to configure.

5. Click the Applications tab.

6. Click Add.

The Firewall Policy - Add application dialog box appears.

7. In the Search period field, click the drop-down arrow and select the period for which you want to display application events.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Within 24 hours, or select Custom and specify your own time period by selecting the starting and ending dates and times.

8. If you want to view application events of a certain type, in the Event type field, click the drop-down arrow and select the event type.

9. If you want to view application events for a certain file, in the File name field, enter the file name.

If you leave this field empty, application events for all files will be displayed.

You can use wildcards in this field. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters.

10. Click Search to display a list of application events.

11. Select an application event, and then click OK.

■

The application is added to the firewall policy and marked as Trusted.

■

The application's checksum is added to the list of allowed checksums.

7.2.2.3.3 Remove an application from a firewall policy

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To remove an application from a firewall policy:

1. Check which firewall policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall, and then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

4. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location that you want to configure.

5. Click the Applications tab.

6. Select the application in the list, and then click Remove.

7.2.2.3.4 Trust an application

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

123

Sophos Enterprise Console

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To trust an application on a group of computers:

1. Check which firewall policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall, and then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

4. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location that you want to configure.

5. Click the Applications tab.

If the application is not in the list, follow the instructions in Add an application to a firewall policy

(page 122) to add it.

6. Select the application in the list, and then click Trust.

■

The application is added to the firewall policy and marked as Trusted.

■

The application's checksum is added to the list of allowed checksums.

Trusted applications are allowed full and unconditional network access, including access to the internet. For greater security, you can apply one or more application rules to specify the conditions under which the application can run.

■

Create an application rule (page 133)

Apply preset application rules (page 136)

7.2.2.3.5 Trust an application using the Firewall Event Viewer

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

If the firewall reports an unknown application or blocks an application on your networked computers, an event is displayed in the Firewall Event Viewer. This topic describes how to trust an application from the Firewall Event Viewer and apply the new rule to your chosen firewall policies.

To find details of reported or blocked applications in the Firewall Event Viewer, and trust them or create new rules for them:

1. On the Events menu, click Firewall Events.

2. In the Firewall - Event Viewer dialog box, select the entry for the application you want to trust or create a rule for, and then click Create Rule.

3. In the dialog box that appears, select whether to trust the application or create a rule for it using an existing preset.

4. From the list of firewall policies, select the firewall policies to which you want to apply the rule.

To apply the rule to all policies, click Select All and then click OK.

■

If you are using checksums, you may have to add the application's checksum to the list of

allowed checksums. See Add an application checksum

(page 127).

124

Help

■

You can also add an application as trusted directly in a firewall policy, using the advanced firewall policy configuration pages. See

Create an application rule from a firewall policy (page

134).

7.2.2.3.6 Block an application

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To block an application on a group of computers:

1. Check which firewall policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall, and then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

4. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location that you want to configure.

5. Click the Applications tab.

If the application is not in the list, follow the instructions in Add an application to a firewall policy

(page 122) to add it.

6. Select the application in the list, and then click Block.

7.2.2.3.7 Allow applications to launch hidden processes

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

An application sometimes launches another hidden process to perform some network access for it.

Malicious applications can use this technique to evade firewalls: they launch a trusted application to access the network rather than doing so themselves.

To allow applications to launch hidden processes:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Processes tab.

5. In the upper area, click Add.

The Firewall Policy - Add application dialog box appears.

125

Sophos Enterprise Console

6. In the Search period field, click the drop-down arrow and select the period for which you want to display application events.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Within 24 hours, or select Custom and specify your own time period by selecting the starting and ending dates and times.

7. If you want to view application events for a certain file, in the File name field, enter the file name.

If you leave this field empty, application events for all files will be displayed.

You can use wildcards in this field. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters.

8. Click Search to display a list of application events.

9. Select an application event, and then click OK.

If you enable interactive mode, the firewall can display a learning dialog on the endpoint computer when it detects a new launcher. For details, see

Enable interactive mode

(page 121).

7.2.2.3.8 Allow applications to use rawsockets

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Some applications can access a network through rawsockets, which gives them control over all aspects of the data they send over the network.

Malicious applications can exploit rawsockets by faking their IP address or send deliberately corrupt messages.

To allow applications to access the network through rawsockets:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Processes tab.

5. In the lower area, click Add.

The Firewall Policy - Add application dialog box appears.

6. In the Search period field, click the drop-down arrow and select the period for which you want to display application events.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Within 24 hours, or select Custom and specify your own time period by selecting the starting and ending dates and times.

7. If you want to view application events for a certain file, in the File name field, enter the file name.

If you leave this field empty, application events for all files will be displayed.

You can use wildcards in this field. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters.

8. Click Search to display a list of application events.

126

Help

9. Select an application event, and then click OK.

If you enable interactive mode, the firewall can display a learning dialog on the endpoint computer when a rawsocket is detected. For details, see

Enable interactive mode (page 121).

7.2.2.3.9 Add an application checksum

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Each version of an application has a unique checksum. The firewall can use this checksum to decide whether an application is allowed or not.

By default, the firewall checks the checksum of each application that runs. If the checksum is unknown or has changed, the firewall blocks it.

To add a checksum to the list of allowed checksums:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Click the Checksums tab.

4. Click Add.

The Firewall Policy - Add application checksum dialog box appears.

5. In the Search period field, click the drop-down arrow and select the period for which you want to display application events.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Within 24 hours, or select Custom and specify your own time period by selecting the starting and ending dates and times.

6. In the Event type field, click the drop-down arrow and select whether you want to add a checksum for a modified application or a new application.

7. If you want to view application events for a certain file, in the File name field, enter the file name.

If you leave this field empty, application events for all files will be displayed.

You can use wildcards in this field. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters.

8. Click Search to display a list of application events.

9. Select the application event for which you want to add a checksum, and then click OK.

The application checksum is added to the list of allowed checksums in the Firewall Policy dialog box.

If you enable interactive mode, the firewall can display a learning dialog on the endpoint computer

when it detects a new or modified application. For details, see Enable interactive mode

(page

121).

7.2.2.3.10 Turn blocking of modified processes on or off

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

127

Sophos Enterprise Console

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Malware may attempt to evade the firewall by modifying a process in memory that has been initiated by a trusted program, and then using the modified process to access the network on its behalf.

You can configure the firewall to detect and block processes that have been modified in memory.

To turn blocking of modified processes on or off:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. On the General tab, under Blocking, clear the Block processes if memory is modified by

another application check box to turn blocking of modified processes off.

To turn blocking of modified processes on, select the check box.

If the firewall detects that a process has been modified in memory, it adds rules to prevent the modified process from accessing the network.

Notes

■

We do not recommend that you turn blocking of modified processes off permanently. You should turn it off only when you need to.

Blocking of modified processes is not supported on 64-bit versions of Windows.

■

Only the modified process is blocked. The modifying program is not blocked from accessing the network.

7.2.2.3.11 Filter ICMP messages

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) messages allow the computers on a network to share error and status information. You can allow or block specific types of incoming or outgoing ICMP message.

You should only filter ICMP messages if you are familiar with networking protocols. For explanations

of the ICMP message types, see Explanation of ICMP message types

(page 129).

To filter ICMP messages:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

128

Help

4. On the ICMP tab, select the In or Out check box to allow incoming or outgoing messages of the specified type.

7.2.2.3.12 Explanation of ICMP message types

Echo Request, Echo Reply

Used to test destination accessibility and status. A host sends an

Echo Request and listens for a corresponding Echo Reply. This is most commonly done using the

ping

command.

Destination Unreachable,

Echo Reply

Sent by a router when it cannot deliver an IP datagram. A datagram is the unit of data, or packet, transmitted in a TCP/IP network.

Source Quench

Sent by a host or router if it is receiving data too quickly for it to handle. The message is a request that the source reduce its rate of datagram transmission.

Redirect Message

Router Advertisement,

Router Solicitation

Sent by a router if it receives a datagram that should have been sent to a different router. The message contains the address to which the source should direct future datagrams. This is used to optimize the routing of network traffic.

Allow hosts to discover the existence of routers. Routers periodically broadcast their IP addresses via Router

Advertisement messages. Hosts may also request a router address by broadcasting a Router Solicitation message to which a router replies with a Router Advertisement.

Time Exceeded

Parameter Problem

Timestamp Request,

Timestamp Reply

Information Request,

Information Reply

Sent by a router if the datagram has reached the maximum limit of routers through which it can travel.

Sent by a router if a problem occurs during the transmission of a datagram such that it cannot complete processing. One potential source of such a problem is invalid datagram header.

Used to synchronize the clocks between hosts and to estimate transit time.

Obsolete.These messages were used earlier by hosts to determine their inter-network addresses, but are now considered outdated and should not be used.

Address Mask Request,

Address Mask Reply

Used to find the mask of the subnet (i.e. what address bits define the network). A host sends an Address Mask Request to a router and receives an Address Mask Reply in return.

7.2.2.4 Firewall rules

7.2.2.4.1 About firewall rules

Global rules

129

Sophos Enterprise Console

Global rules apply to all network communications and to applications even if they have application rules.

Application rules

You can have one or more rules for an application. You can either use preset rules created by

Sophos or create custom rules to give you fine control over the access allowed for an application.

For information about the settings for the default global and application rules, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/57757.aspx

7.2.2.4.2 About the order in which rules are applied

For connections that use rawsockets, only the global rules are checked.

For connections that do not use rawsockets, various rules are checked, depending on whether the connection is to a network address that is listed on the LAN tab or not.

If the network address is listed on the LAN tab, the following rules are checked:

■

If the address has been marked as Trusted, all traffic on the connection is allowed with no further checks.

If the address has been marked as NetBIOS, file and printer sharing on any connection that meets the following criteria is allowed:

Connection

TCP

UDP

Port

Remote

Local

Remote

Local

Range

137-139 or 445

137 or 138

If the network address is not listed on the LAN tab, other firewall rules are checked in the following order:

1. Any NetBIOS traffic that has not been allowed using the LAN tab is dealt with according to the setting of the Block file and printer sharing for other networks check box:

■

If the check box is selected, the traffic is blocked.

If the check box is cleared, the traffic is processed by the remaining rules.

2. The high-priority global rules are checked, in the order in which they are listed.

3. If the connection has not already had rules applied to it, the application rules are checked.

4. If the connection has still not been handled, the normal-priority global rules are checked, in the order in which they are listed.

5. If no rules have been found to handle the connection:

■

In Allow by default mode, the traffic is allowed (if it is outbound).

130

Help

■

In Block by default mode, the traffic is blocked.

In Interactive mode, the user is asked to decide.

Note: If you have not changed the working mode, the firewall will be in Block by default mode.

7.2.2.4.3 About local network detection

You can assign the local network for a computer to firewall rules.

When the firewall starts, it determines the computer's local network, and then monitors for any changes whilst it is running. If any change is detected, the firewall updates any local network rules with the new local network address range.

Caution: We strongly advise caution when using local network rules as part of secondary configurations. If the computer is a laptop, and it is used out of the office, it may connect to an unknown local network. If this happens, firewall rules in the secondary configuration that use the local network as an address may inadvertently allow unknown traffic.

7.2.2.4.4 Global rules

7.2.2.4.4.1 Create a global rule

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Important: We recommend that you create global rules only if you are familiar with networking protocols.

Global rules apply to all network communications and to applications which do not already have a rule.

To create a global rule:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Global Rules tab.

5. Click Add.

6. Under Rule name, type a name for the rule.

The rule name must be unique within the list of rules. Two global rules cannot have the same name.

7. To apply the rule before any application rules or normal priority global rules, select the High

priority rule check box.

For information on the order in which rules are applied, see About the order in which rules are applied

(page 130).

8. Under Select the events the rule will handle, select the conditions that the connection must match for the rule to apply.

131

Sophos Enterprise Console

9. Under Select the actions with which the rule will respond, select either Allow it or Block

it.

10. Do one of the following:

■

To allow other connections to and from the same remote address while the initial connection exists, select Concurrent connections.

Note: This option is only available for TCP rules, which are stateful by default.

■

To intelligently allow replies from the remote computer based on the initial connection, select Stateful inspection.

Note: This option is only available for UDP rules.

11. Under Rule description, click an underlined value. For example, if you click the Stateful TCP link, the Select Protocol dialog box opens.

7.2.2.4.4.2 Edit a global rule

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Important: We recommend that you change global rules only if you are familiar with networking protocols.

To edit a global rule:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Global Rules tab.

5. In the Rule list, select the rule that you want to edit.

6. Click Edit.

For information on the global rule settings, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/57757.aspx

7.2.2.4.4.3 Copy a global rule

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To copy a global rule and append it to the list of rules:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

132

Help

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Global Rules tab.

5. In the Rule list, select the rule that you want to copy.

6. Click Copy.

7.2.2.4.4.4 Delete a global rule

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Global Rules tab.

5. In the Rule list, select the rule that you want to delete.

6. Click Remove.

7.2.2.4.4.5 Change the order in which global rules are applied

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Global rules are applied in the order in which they appear from top to bottom in the list of rules.

To change the order in which the global rules are applied:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Global Rules tab.

5. In the Rule list, click the rule that you want to move up or down in the list.

6. Click Move Up or Move Down.

7.2.2.4.5 Application rules

7.2.2.4.5.1 Create an application rule

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

133

Sophos Enterprise Console

To create a custom rule which allows fine control over the access allowed for an application:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Applications tab.

5. Select the application in the list, and then click Custom.

6. In the Application Rules dialog box, click Add.

7. Under Rule name, type a name for the rule.

The rule name must be unique within the list of rules. Two application rules cannot have the same name, but two applications can each have a rule with the same name.

8. Under Select the events the rule will handle, select the conditions that the connection must match for the rule to apply.

9. Under Select the actions with which the rule will respond, select either Allow it or Block

it.

10. Do one of the following:

■

To allow other connections to and from the same remote address while the initial connection exists, select Concurrent connections.

Note: This option is only available for TCP rules, which are stateful by default.

■

To intelligently allow replies from the remote computer based on the initial connection, select Stateful inspection.

Note: This option is only available for UDP rules.

11. Under Rule description, click an underlined value. For example, if you click the Stateful TCP link, the Select Protocol dialog box opens.

7.2.2.4.5.2 Create an application rule from a firewall policy

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can create an application rule directly from a firewall policy using the advanced firewall policy configuration pages.

To create an application rule from a firewall policy:

1. Double-click the policy you want to change.

2. On the welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click the Advanced firewall policy button.

3. In the Firewall Policy dialog box that appears, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

134

Help

4. Do one of the following:

■

If you want to add an application to the firewall policy, in the dialog box that appears, go to the Applications tab and click Add.

If you want to allow an application to launch hidden processes, go to the Processes tab and click Add in the upper area.

If you want to allow an application to access the network using rawsockets, go to the

Processes tab and click Add in the lower area.

The Firewall policy - Add application dialog box appears.

5. If you are adding an application, in the Event type box, select whether you want to add a modified application, a new application, or an application for which there is no application rule set up in the firewall policy.

6. Select an entry for the application you want to add or allow to launch hidden processes or use rawsockets, and click OK.

The application is added to the firewall policy.

If you added an application on the Applications tab, the application is added as trusted. If you want, you can block it or create a custom rule for it.

7.2.2.4.5.3 Edit an application rule

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Applications tab.

5. Select the application in the list, and then click Custom.

6. In the Application Rules dialog box, click Edit.

7. Under Rule name, type a name for the rule.

The rule name must be unique within the list of rules. Two application rules cannot have the same name, but two applications can each have a rule with the same name.

8. Under Select the events the rule will handle, select the conditions that the connection must match for the rule to apply.

9. Under Select the actions with which the rule will respond, select either Allow it or Block

it.

10. Do one of the following:

■

To allow other connections to and from the same remote address while the initial connection exists, select Concurrent connections.

Note: This option is only available for TCP rules, which are stateful by default.

135

Sophos Enterprise Console

■

To intelligently allow replies from the remote computer based on the initial connection, select Stateful inspection.

Note: This option is only available for UDP rules.

11. Under Rule description, click an underlined value. For example, if you click the Stateful TCP link, the Select Protocol dialog box opens.

7.2.2.4.5.4 Apply preset application rules

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

A preset is a set of application rules created by Sophos. To append preset rules to the list of rules for an application:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Applications tab.

5. Select the application in the list, and then click Custom.

6. Point to Add rules from preset, and then click a preset.

7.2.2.4.5.5 Copy an application rule

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To copy an application rule and append it to the list of rules:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Applications tab.

5. Select the application in the list, and then click Custom.

6. In the Application Rules dialog box, select the rule you want to copy and click Copy.

7.2.2.4.5.6 Delete an application rule

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

136

Help

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Applications tab.

5. Select the application in the list, and then click Custom.

6. In the Application Rules dialog box, select the rule you want to remove and click Remove.

7.2.2.4.5.7 Change the order in which application rules are applied

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Application rules are applied in the order in which they appear from top to bottom in the list of rules.

To change the order in which the application rules are applied:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Applications tab.

5. Select the application in the list, and then click Custom.

6. In the Application Rules dialog box, in the Rule list, click the rule that you want to move up or down in the list.

7. Click Move Up or Move Down.

7.2.2.5 Location awareness

7.2.2.5.1 About location awareness

Location awareness is a feature of Sophos Client Firewall that assigns a firewall configuration to each network adapter on a computer, depending on the current location of the computer's network adapters.

The most common scenario in which this feature is used is where an employee has a company laptop and works from home. They are using two network connections simultaneously:

■

For work use, they connect to the office network through a VPN client and a virtual network

adapter.

■

For personal use, they connect to their ISP through a network cable and a physical network

adapter.

137

Sophos Enterprise Console

In this scenario, you need the office configuration to be applied to the virtual office connection and the non-office, generally more restrictive, configuration to be applied to the non-office ISP connection.

Note: The non-office configuration requires sufficient rules to allow the "virtual" office connection to be established.

7.2.2.5.2 About setting up location awareness

1. Define the list of gateway MAC addresses or domain names of your primary locations. Typically, these are your office networks.

2. Create the firewall configuration to be used for your primary locations. Typically, this configuration is less restrictive.

3. Create a secondary firewall configuration. Typically, this configuration is more restrictive.

4. Choose a configuration to apply.

Depending on the detection method you are using, the firewall obtains the DNS or gateway address for each computer's network adapters, and then matches it against your list of addresses.

■

If any of the addresses in your list matches the address of a network adapter, the adapter is assigned the configuration for the primary location.

■

If none of the addresses in your list matches the address of a network adapter, the adapter is assigned the policy for the secondary location.

Important: The secondary configuration switches from Interactive mode to Block by default mode on a computer when both the following conditions are met:

■

Both locations are active.

The primary configuration is not interactive.

7.2.2.5.3 Define your primary locations

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the Location detection tab.

5. Under Detection method, click Configure next to the method that you want to use to define your primary locations:

Identify location by DNS

Identify location by gateway MAC address

You create a list of domain names and expected

IP addresses that correspond to your primary locations.

You create a list of gateway MAC addresses that correspond to your primary locations.

6. Follow the instructions on the screen.

7.2.2.5.4 Create a secondary configuration

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

138

Help

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Select the Add configuration for a second location check box.

Now set up your secondary configuration. For information on how to do this, see the Configuring

the firewall section.

7.2.2.5.5 Choose a configuration to apply

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. On the General tab, under Applied location, click one of the following options:

Option Description

Apply the configuration for the detected location

The firewall applies either the primary or secondary configuration to each network connection according to the detection settings for location awareness (as described in

About setting up location awareness

(page 138)).

Apply the configuration for the primary location

The firewall applies the primary configuration to all network connections.

Apply the configuration for the secondary location

The firewall applies the secondary configuration to all network connections.

7.2.2.6 Firewall reporting

7.2.2.6.1 About firewall reporting

By default, the firewall on an endpoint computer reports state changes, events, and errors to

Enterprise Console.

Firewall state changes

The firewall regards the following as state changes:

■

Changes to the working mode

Changes to the software version

■

Changes to whether the firewall is configured to allow all traffic

Changes to whether the firewall complies with policy

139

Sophos Enterprise Console

When you are working in interactive mode, your firewall configuration may deliberately differ from the policy applied by Enterprise Console. In that case, you can choose not to send "differs from policy" alerts to Enterprise Console when you make changes to certain parts of your firewall configuration.

For more information, see

Turn reporting of local changes on or off

(page 140).

Firewall events

An event is when the endpoint computer's operating system, or an unknown application on the endpoint computer, tries to communicate with another computer over a network connection.

You can prevent the firewall from reporting events to Enterprise Console.

For more information, see

Turn off reporting of unknown network traffic

(page 140).

7.2.2.6.2 Turn reporting of local changes on or off

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

If the firewall configuration on endpoint computers differs from policy, you can turn reporting of

local changes off.

Turning reporting of local changes off stops the firewall sending "differs from policy" alerts to

Enterprise Console about changes made to the global rules, applications, processes, or checksums.

You may want to do this, for example, when the endpoint computers are in interactive mode, since these are settings that can be changed by using the learning dialogs.

If the firewall configuration on endpoint computers is intended to conform to policy, you should

turn reporting of local changes on.

To turn reporting of local changes off:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the General tab.

5. Under Reporting, do one of the following:

■

To turn reporting of local changes on, select the Display an alert in the management

console if local changes are made to the global rules, applications, processes or

checksums check box.

To turn reporting of local changes off, clear the Display an alert in the management

console if local changes are made to the global rules, applications, processes or

checksums check box.

7.2.2.6.3 Turn off reporting of unknown network traffic

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

140

Help

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can prevent the firewall on endpoint computers from reporting unknown network traffic to

Enterprise Console. The firewall regards traffic as unknown if there is no rule for it.

To prevent the firewall on endpoint computers from reporting unknown network traffic to Enterprise

Console:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the General tab.

5. Under Blocking, select the Use checksums to authenticate applications check box.

6. Under Reporting, clear the Report unknown applications and traffic to the management

console check box.

7.2.2.6.4 Turn off reporting of firewall errors

Important: We do not recommend that you turn off reporting of firewall errors permanently. You should turn off reporting only when you need to.

To prevent the firewall on endpoint computers from reporting errors to Enterprise Console:

1. Double-click the firewall policy you want to change.

2. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

3. Under Configurations, click Configure next to the location for which you want to configure the firewall.

4. Click the General tab.

5. Under Reporting, clear the Report errors to the management console check box.

7.2.2.7 Import or export firewall configuration

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - firewall right to configure a firewall policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can import or export the firewall general settings and rules as a configuration file (*.conf).

You can use this feature to do the following:

■

Back up and restore your firewall configuration.

■

Import application rules created on one computer and use them to create a policy for other computers running the same set of applications.

Merge configurations created on several different computers to create a policy that is valid for one or more groups of computers on the network.

To import or export firewall configuration:

1. Check which firewall policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

141

Sophos Enterprise Console

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Firewall, and then double-click the policy you want to import to or export from.

3. On the Welcome page of the Firewall Policy wizard, click Advanced firewall policy.

4. In the Firewall Policy dialog box, on the General tab, under Managing configuration, click

Import or Export.

7.3 Configuring the application control policy

7.3.1 About application control

Enterprise Console enables you to detect and block "controlled applications", that is, legitimate applications that are not a security threat, but that you decide are unsuitable for use in your office environment. Such applications may include instant messaging (IM) clients, Voice over Internet

Protocol (VoIP) clients, digital imaging software, media players, or browser plug-ins.

Note: This option applies only to Sophos Endpoint Security and Control for Windows.

Applications can be blocked or authorized for different groups of computers with complete flexibility.

For example, VoIP can be switched off for office-based desktop computers, yet authorized for remote computers.

The list of controlled applications is supplied by Sophos and updated regularly. You cannot add new applications to the list, but you can submit a request to Sophos to include a new legitimate application you would like to control on your network. For details, see Sophos support knowledgebase article 35330 ( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/35330.aspx

This section describes how to select the applications you want to control on your network and set up scanning for controlled applications.

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - application control right to configure an application control policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information about role-based administration, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

Application control events

When an application control event occurs, for example, a controlled application has been detected on the network, the event is written in the application control event log that can be viewed from

Enterprise Console. For details, see View application control events (page 195).

The number of computers with events over a specified threshold within the last seven days is displayed on the Dashboard.

You can also set up alerts to be sent to your chosen recipients when an application control event has occurred. For details, see

Set up application control alerts and messages

(page 189).

142

Help

7.3.2 Select the applications you want to control

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - application control right to configure an application control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

By default, all applications are allowed. You can select the applications you want to control as follows:

1. Check which application control policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Application control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Application control policy dialog box, click the Authorization tab.

4. Select an Application type, for example, File sharing.

A full list of the applications included in that group is displayed in the Authorized list below.

■

To block an application, select it and move it to the Blocked list by clicking the “Add” button.

■

To block any new applications that Sophos adds to that type in the future, move All added

by Sophos in the future to the Blocked list.

■

To block all applications of that type, move all applications from the Authorized list to the

Blocked list by clicking the “Add all” button.

5. On the Scanning tab of the Application control policy dialog box, make sure that scanning for controlled applications is enabled. (See

Scan for applications you want to control

(page

143) for details.) Click OK.

7.3.3 Scan for applications you want to control

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - application control right to configure an application control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

143

Sophos Enterprise Console

You can configure Sophos Endpoint Security and Control to scan for applications you want to control on your network on access.

1. Check which application control policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Application control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Application control policy dialog box is displayed.

3. On the Scanning tab, set the options as follows:

■

To enable on-access scanning, select the Enable on-access scanning check box. If you want to detect applications but do not want to block them on access, select the Detect but

allow to run check box.

■

To enable on-demand and scheduled scanning, select the Enable on-demand and

scheduled scanning check box.

Note: Your anti-virus and HIPS policy settings determine which files are scanned (that is, the extensions and exclusions).

If you want to remove controlled applications found on your networked computers, follow the instructions in

Uninstall controlled applications you do not want

(page 144).

You can also have alerts sent to particular users if a controlled application is found on any of the computers in the group. For instructions, see

Set up application control alerts and messages

(page 189).

7.3.4 Uninstall controlled applications you do not want

Before you uninstall controlled applications, ensure that on-access scanning for controlled applications is disabled. This type of scanning blocks the programs used to install and uninstall applications, so it may interfere with uninstallation.

You can remove an application in one of two ways:

■

Go to each computer and run the uninstaller for that product.You can usually do this by opening the Windows Control Panel and using Add/Remove Programs.

■

At the server, use your usual script or administration tool to run the uninstaller for that product on your networked computers.

Now you can enable on-access scanning for controlled applications.

7.4 Configuring the data control policy

7.4.1 About data control

Note: This feature is not included with all licenses. If you want to use it, you might need to change your license. For more information, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/products/complete/comparison.aspx

144

Help

Data control enables you to reduce accidental data loss from workstations by monitoring and restricting the transfer of files containing sensitive data. You do this by creating data control rules and then adding the rules to the Data control policies.

You can monitor and control the transfer of files to specified storage devices (e.g. removable storage device or optical drive) or by specified applications (e.g. email client or web browser).

To enable you to quickly define and roll out a data control policy, SophosLabs maintain a library of sensitive data definitions (Content Control Lists). The main focus for this library is personally identifiable information, but it also covers other common data structures. You can use Content

Control Lists in Enterprise Console, as described further in this section.

7.4.2 How does data control work?

Data control identifies accidental data loss that is typically caused by employees mishandling sensitive data. For example, a user sends a file containing sensitive data home via web-based email.

Data control enables you to monitor and control the transfer of files from computers to storage devices and applications connected to the internet.

■

Storage devices: Data control intercepts all files copied onto monitored storage devices using

Windows Explorer (this includes the Windows desktop). However, direct saves from within applications, such as Microsoft Word, or transfers made using the command prompt are not intercepted.

It is possible to force all transfers onto monitored storage devices to be made using Windows

Explorer by using either the Allow transfer on acceptance by user and log event action or the Block transfer and log event action. In either case, any attempt to save directly from within an application or transfer files using the command prompt are blocked by data control, and a desktop alert is displayed to the user requesting that they use Windows Explorer to complete the transfer.

When a data control policy only contains rules with the Allow file transfer and log event action, direct saves from within applications and transfers using the command prompt are not intercepted. This behavior enables users to use storage devices without any restrictions.

However, data control events are still logged for transfers made using Windows Explorer.

Note: This restriction does not apply to application monitoring.

■

Applications: To ensure only file uploads by users are monitored, some system file locations are excluded from data control monitoring. This significantly reduces the risk of data control events being generated by applications opening configuration files as opposed to users uploading files.

Important: If you experience erroneous events generated by an application opening configuration files, the problem can usually be solved by adding custom location exclusions or by configuring a data control rule to be less sensitive. For more information, see support knowledgebase article 113024

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/113024.aspx

Note: If you exclude remote files from on-access scanning in the anti-virus and HIPS policy, data control will not scan files uploaded or attached from a network location using a monitored application, for example, an email client, a web browser, or an instant messaging (IM) client.

This is because data control uses the same set of exclusions as the Sophos Anti-Virus

145

Sophos Enterprise Console on-access scanner, so if remote file scanning is disabled, it will not send any remote files for a data control check. This restriction does not apply to storage device monitoring. For information about configuring on-access scanning exclusions, see

Exclude items from on-access scanning (page 93).

Data control policies

Data control enables you to monitor and control the transfer of files by defining data control policies and applying them to groups of computers on your network.

Important: Data control is not supported on Windows 2008 Server Core and must be disabled on computers running this operating system. To exclude Windows 2008 Server Core computers from data control scanning, put them in a group that has a data control policy with data control scanning disabled. For details, see

Turn data control on or off (page 149).

Data control policies include one or more rules that specify conditions and actions to be taken when the rule is matched. A data control rule can be included in multiple policies.

When a data control policy contains several rules, a file that matches any of the rules in the data control policy violates the policy.

Data control rule conditions

The data control rule conditions include destination, file name and extension, file type, or file content.

Destination includes devices (for example, removable storage devices, such as USB flash drives) and applications (for example, internet browsers and email clients).

The matching of file content is defined using a Content Control List. This is an XML based description of structured data. SophosLabs provide an extensive set of Content Control Lists which can be used within your data control rules.

For more information about data control rules and conditions applied to files, see

About data control rules

(page 147).

For more information about Content Control Lists (CCLs) that define file content, see About

Content Control Lists (page 148).

146

Help

Figure 2: Data Control

Data control rule actions

When data control detects all the conditions specified in a rule, the rule is matched, and data control takes the action specified in the rule and logs the event.You can specify one of the following actions:

■

Allow file transfer and log event

Allow transfer on acceptance by user and log event

■

Block transfer and log event

If a file matches two data control rules that specify different actions, the rule that specifies the most restrictive action is applied. Data control rules that block file transfer take priority over the rules that allow file transfer on user acceptance. Rules that allow file transfer on user acceptance take priority over the rules that allow file transfer.

By default, when the rule is matched and file transfer is blocked or user confirmation of file transfer is required, a message is displayed on the endpoint computer's desktop. The rule that has been matched is included in the message. You can add your own custom messages to the standard messages for user confirmation of file transfer and for blocked file transfer. For more information, see

Set up data control alerts and messages

(page 190).

7.4.3 About data control rules

Data control rules specify conditions for data control scanning to detect, actions to be taken if rules are matched, and any files to be excluded from scanning.

You can create your own rules or use the sample rules provided. We provide a number of preconfigured data control rules that you can use unmodified or customize to your own needs.

These rules are provided as examples only and are not updated.

147

Sophos Enterprise Console

There are two types of data control rule: file matching rule and content rule.

File matching rules

A file matching rule specifies action to be taken if a user attempts to transfer a file with the specified file name or of the specified file type (true file type category, e.g. a spreadsheet) to the specified destination, for example, block the transfer of databases to removable storage devices.

Data control includes true file type definitions for over 150 different file formats. We may add additional true file types from time to time. The newly added types will be automatically added to any data control rules that use the relevant true file type category.

File types not covered by a true file type definition can be identified using their file extensions.

Content rules

A content rule is a rule that contains one or more Content Control Lists and specifies action to be taken if a user attempts to transfer data that matches all the Content Control Lists in the rule to the specified destination.

7.4.4 About Content Control Lists

A Content Control List (CCL) is a set of conditions that describe structured file content. A Content

Control List may describe a single type of data (for example, a postal address or social security number) or a combination of data types (for example, a project name near to the term

"confidential").

You can use SophosLabs Content Control Lists that are provided by Sophos or create your own

Content Control Lists.

SophosLabs Content Control Lists provide expert definitions for common financial and personally identifiable data types, for example, credit card numbers, social security numbers, postal addresses, or email addresses. Advanced techniques, such as checksums, are used in SophosLabs Content

Control Lists to increase the accuracy of sensitive data detection.

You cannot edit SophosLabs Content Control Lists, but you can submit a request to Sophos to create a new SophosLabs Content Control List. For details, see Sophos support knowledgebase article 51976 ( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/51976.aspx

Note: Double-byte characters (for example, Japanese or Chinese characters) are not officially supported in the current version of Content Control Lists. However, you can enter double-byte characters in the Content Control List editor.

Setting up the quantity for SophosLabs Content Control Lists

Most SophosLabs Content Control Lists have quantity assigned to them.

A quantity is the volume of the Content Control List key data type that must be found in a file before the Content Control List is matched. You can edit the quantity of a SophosLabs Content

Control List in a content rule that includes that Content Control List.

Using quantity, you can fine-tune your data control rules and avoid blocking documents that do not contain sensitive information (for example, a document containing one postal address or one or two telephone numbers, possibly in the letterhead or signature). If you search for a single postal

148

Help address, thousands of documents may match the rule and trigger a data control event. However, if you want to prevent the loss of a customer list, you may want to only detect the transfer of documents containing, for example, more than 50 postal addresses. In other cases, however, it may be advisable to search for a single instance of content, for example, a credit card number.

7.4.5 About data control events

When a data control event occurs, for example, the copying of a file containing sensitive data to a USB flash drive, the event is sent to Enterprise Console and can be viewed in the Data Control

- Event Viewer. The event is also logged locally on the endpoint computer and can be viewed, with the appropriate permissions, in Sophos Endpoint Security and Control.

Note: An endpoint computer can send to Enterprise Console a maximum of 50 data control events per hour. All events are logged locally on the endpoint computer.

In the Data Control - Event Viewer dialog box, you can use filters to display only the events you are interested in. You can also export the list of data control events to a file. For details, see

View data control events

(page 196) and

Export the list of events to a file (page 204).

The number of computers with data control events over a specified threshold within the last seven

days is displayed on the Dashboard. For information on how to set up the threshold, see Configure the Dashboard (page 56).

You can also set up alerts to be sent to your chosen recipients when a data control event has

occurred. For details, see Set up data control alerts and messages

(page 190).

7.4.6 Turn data control on or off

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - data control right to configure a data control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

By default, data control is turned off and no rules are specified to monitor or restrict the transfer of files over the network.

To turn data control on:

1. Check which data control policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Data control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Data control policy dialog box is displayed.

3. On the Policy Rules tab, select the Enable data control scanning check box.

4. Click the Add Rule button. In the Data Control Rule Management dialog box, select the rules you want to add to the policy and click OK.

Important: If you do not add any data control rules, data control will not monitor or restrict the transfer of files until you do so.

149

Sophos Enterprise Console

If you later want to disable data control scanning, clear the Enable data control scanning check box.

7.4.7 Create a file matching rule

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Data control customization right to create or edit data control rules.

■

You must have the Policy setting - data control right to set up data control policies.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

For an overview of file matching rules, see

About data control rules

(page 147).

To create a file matching rule and add it to a data control policy:

1. Check which data control policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

Alternatively, you can create a rule from the Tools menu and add it to a policy or policies later.

On the Tools menu, point to Manage Data Control, and then click Data control rules and perform steps 4 to 10.

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Data control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Data control policy dialog box, on the Policy Rules tab, make sure the Enable data

control scanning check box is selected and click Manage Rules.

4. In the Data Control Rule Management dialog box, click the Add File Matching Rule button.

5. In the Create a File Matching Rule dialog box, under Rule name, type a name for the rule.

6. Under Rule description (optional), enter the rule's description, if you wish.

7. Under Select the rule's conditions, select conditions for the rule.

The destination condition is preselected and must be included in the rule.

By default, all file types are scanned. If you want to scan only certain file types, select Where

the file type is. You can then set up this condition as described in step 10.

8. Under Select the action to take if the rule is matched, select the action.

9. If you want to exclude some files from data control scanning, under Select files to exclude, select the Where file name matches or Where the file type is check box.

150

Help

10. Under Rule content, click each underlined value and set up the rule's conditions.

For example, if you click Select destination, the Match Destination Type Condition dialog box opens, where you can select the devices and/or applications to which you want to restrict the transfer of data.

Select or enter conditions for each underlined value.

Click OK.

The new rule appears in the Data Control Rule Management dialog box.

11. To add the rule to the policy, select the check box next to the rule's name and click OK.

The rule is added to the data control policy.

You can set up alerts and messages that will be sent to the user when a rule in the data control policy is matched. See

Set up data control alerts and messages (page 190).

151

Sophos Enterprise Console

7.4.8 Create a content rule

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Data control customization right to create or edit data control rules and

Content Control Lists.

■

You must have the Policy setting - data control right to set up data control policies.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

For an overview of content rules and Content Control Lists, see About data control rules (page

147).

To create a content rule and add it to a data control policy:

1. Check which data control policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

Alternatively, you can create a rule from the Tools menu and add it to a policy or policies later.

On the Tools menu, point to Manage Data Control, and then click Data control rules and perform steps 4 to 13.

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Data control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Data control policy dialog box, on the Policy Rules tab, make sure the Enable data

control scanning check box is selected and click Manage Rules.

4. In the Data Control Rule Management dialog box, click the Add Content Rule button.

5. In the Create a Content Rule dialog box, under Rule name, type a name for the rule.

6. Under Rule description (optional), enter the rule’s description, if you wish.

7. Under Select the rule's conditions, the file content and destination conditions are already selected. You must set up both conditions for a content rule.

8. Under Select the action to take if the rule is matched, select the action.

9. If you want to exclude some files from data control scanning, under Select files to exclude, select the Where file name matches or Where the file type is check box.

10. Under Rule content, click the “select file content” underlined value.

11. In the Content Control List Management dialog box, select the Content Control Lists you want to include in the rule.

If you want to add a SophosLabs Content Control List, select the one that applies to your country or select a global Content Control List.

If you want to create a new Content Control List, see

Create or edit a simple Content Control

List

(page 155) or

Create or edit an advanced Content Control List (page 156).

Click OK.

12. If you want to change quantity assigned to a SophosLabs Content Control List, under Rule

content, click the “quantity” underlined value (“n or more matches”) that you want to change.

In the Quantity editor dialog box, enter a new quantity.

152

13. Under Rule content, select or enter conditions for the rest of the underlined values.

Help

Click OK.

The new rule appears in the Data Control Rule Management dialog box.

14. To add the rule to the policy, select the check box next to the rule’ name and click OK.

The rule is added to the data control policy.

You can set up alerts and messages that will be sent to the user when a rule in the data control policy is matched. See

Set up data control alerts and messages (page 190).

7.4.9 Add a data control rule to a policy

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - data control right to perform this task.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

153

Sophos Enterprise Console

To add a data control rule to a policy:

1. Check which data control policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Data control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Data control policy dialog box is displayed.

3. On the Policy Rules tab, click Add Rule.

The Data Control Rule Management dialog box is displayed.

4. Select the rules you want to add to the policy and click OK.

7.4.10 Remove a data control rule from a policy

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - data control right to perform this task.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To remove a data control rule from a policy:

1. Check which data control policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Data control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Data control policy dialog box is displayed.

3. On the Policy Rules tab, select the rule you want to remove and click Remove Rule.

7.4.11 Exclude files or file types from data control

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Data control customization right to

exclude files from data control. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can exclude files and file types from data control by setting up exclusions in a data control rule.

To exclude a file or file type from data control, exclude it in a rule with the highest priority (that is, specifying the most restrictive action).

To exclude files or file types from data control:

1. On the Tools menu, point to Manage Data Control, and then click Data Control Rules.

2. In the Data Control Rule Management dialog box, select the rule you want to edit and click

Edit, or create a new rule by clicking the Add file matching rule or Add content rule button.

154

Help

3. To exclude files from data control, in the Rule Editor dialog box, under Select files to exclude, select the Where file name matches check box.

4. Under Rule content, click the underlined value to specify excluded file names.

5. In the Exclude File Name Condition dialog box, click Add and specify the names of the files you want to exclude.

You can use the wildcards * and ?

The wildcard * can be used only in a filename or extension, in the form [filename].* or

*.[extension]. For example, file*.txt, file.txt* and file.*txt are invalid.

6. To exclude file types from data control, in the Rule Editor dialog box, under Select files to

exclude, select the Where the file type is check box.

7. Under Rule content, click the underlined value to specify excluded file types.

8. In the Exclude File Type Condition dialog box, select the file types you want to exclude and click OK.

7.4.12 Import or export a data control rule

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Data control customization right to

import or export a data control rule. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page

20).

Data control rules can be imported into or exported from Enterprise Console as XML files.

To import or export a data control rule:

1. On the Tools menu, point to Manage Data Control, and then click Data control rules.

2. In the Data Control Rule Management dialog box, click Import or Export.

■

If you want to import a rule, in the Import dialog box, browse to the rule you want to import, select it and click Open.

If you want to export a rule, in the Export dialog box, browse to select a destination for the file, type a name for the file and click Save.

7.4.13 Create or edit a simple Content Control List

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Data control customization right to

create a Content Control List. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

For an overview of Content Control Lists, see

About Content Control Lists

(page 148).

To create or edit a Content Control List:

1. On the Tools menu, point to Manage Data Control, and then click Data Control Content

Control Lists.

2. In the Content Control List Management dialog box, click Add to create a new Content

Control List, or select an existing Content Control List and click Edit.

155

Sophos Enterprise Console

3. In the Add Content Control List dialog box, in the Name field, enter a name for the Content

Control List.

4. In the Description field, enter a description for the Content Control List, if you wish.

5. If you want to add tags or edit the tags assigned to the Content Control List, click Change next to the Tags field.

You can assign tags to identify the Content Control List's type and region where it applies.

6. In the Edit Content Control List Tags dialog box, in the Available tags list, select the tags you want to assign and move them to the Selected tags list. Click OK.

7. In the Scan for content matching section, select a search condition (“Any of these terms”,

“All of these terms”, or “Exactly this phrase”) and enter the search terms you want to find in documents, separated by a space. Click OK.

Note: The search is case insensitive.

Quotation marks are not supported in simple Content Control Lists. Use the “Exactly this phrase” condition to scan for an exact phrase.

To create more complex expressions, use the advanced Content Control List editor as described in

Create or edit an advanced Content Control List (page 156).

The new content control list appears in the Content Control List Management dialog box.

Examples

Search condition

Match any term

Match all terms

Exact match

Example confidential secret project confidential for internal use only

Description

Matches documents containing either

"confidential" or "secret".

Matches documents containing both

"project" and "confidential".

Matches documents containing the phrase "for internal use only".

Now you can add the new Content Control List to a content rule.

7.4.14 Create or edit an advanced Content Control List

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Data control customization right to

create a Content Control List. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

For an overview of Content Control Lists, see

About Content Control Lists

(page 148).

You can create a Content Control List that consists of one or more regular expressions and a trigger score. To do this, use the advanced editor.

156

Help

To create or edit a Content Control List using the advanced editor:

1. On the Tools menu, point to Manage Data Control, and then click Data Control Content

Control Lists.

2. In the Content Control List Management dialog box, click Add to create a new Content

Control List, or select an existing Content Control List and click Edit.

3. In the Add Content Control List dialog box, in the Name field, enter a name for the Content

Control List.

4. In the Description field, enter a description for the Content Control List, if you wish.

5. If you want to add tags or edit the tags assigned to the Content Control List, click Change next to the Tags field.

You can assign tags to identify the Content Control List's type and region where it applies.

6. In the Edit Content Control List Tags dialog box, in the Available tags list, select the tags you want to assign and move them to the Selected tags list. Click OK.

7. Click the Advanced button.

8. In the Advanced pane, click Create to create a new expression, or select an existing expression and click Edit.

9. In the Content Control List - Advanced dialog box, enter a Perl 5 regular expression.

For a description of Perl 5 regular expressions, refer to Perl documentation or visit http://www.boost.org/doc/libs/1_34_1/libs/regex/doc/syntax_perl.html

10. In the Expression score field, enter the number that will be added to the total score for a

Content Control List when the regular expression is matched.

11. In the Maximum count field, enter the maximum number of matches for the regular expression that can be counted towards the total score.

For example, an expression with the score of 5 and the maximum count of 2 can add the maximum of 10 to the total score of the Content Control List. If the expression is found 3 times, it still adds 10 to the total score.

Click OK.

12. Repeat steps 5 to 11 if you want to add more regular expressions to the Content Control List.

157

Sophos Enterprise Console

13. In the Trigger score field, enter the number of times a regular expression must be matched before the Content Control List is matched.

For example, consider a Content Control List that has the trigger score of 8 and consists of 3 expressions (A, B, and C) with the following scores and maximum counts:

Expression

Expression A

Expression B

Expression C

Score

Maximum count

This Content Control List is matched if data control finds 2 matches of expression A or 1 match of expression A and 1 match of expression B, or 1 match of expression B and 5 matches of expression C.

Click OK.

The new Content Control List appears in the Content Control List Management dialog box.

Regular expression example

(?i)\b[a-ceghj-npr-tw-z][a-ceghj-npr-tw-z]\s?\d{2}\s?\d{2}\s?\d{2}\s?[abcd]?\b

This regular expression matches UK National Insurance numbers, for example, AA 11 11 11 A.

(?i)

[a-ceghj-npr-tw-z]

\s?

\d{2}

[abcd]

Makes the match case-insensitive.

Matches a boundary between a word character and a non-word character.

Matches any single character in the range of characters (A to C E G H J to N

P R to T W to Z).

Matches the preceding element zero or one time.

Matches zero or one whitespace.

Matches two digits.

Matches any single character from the list (A, B, C, or D).

Now you can add the new Content Control List to a content rule.

158

Help

7.4.15 Import or export a Content Control List

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Data control customization right to

import or export a Content Control List. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

Content Control Lists can be imported into or exported from Enterprise Console as XML files.

You can share Content Control Lists between Sophos products that support them.

Note: SophosLabs Content Control Lists cannot be exported.

To import or export a Content Control List:

1. On the Tools menu, point to Manage Data Control, and then click Data control content

control lists.

2. In the Content Control List Management dialog box, click Import or Export.

■

If you want to import a Content Control List, in the Import dialog box, browse to the Content

Control List you want to import, select it and click Open.

If you want to export a Content Control List, in the Export dialog box, browse to select a destination for the file, type a name for the file and click Save.

7.5 Configuring the device control policy

7.5.1 About device control

Important: Sophos device control should not be deployed alongside device control software from other vendors.

Device control enables you to prevent users from using unauthorized external hardware devices, removable storage media, and wireless connection technologies on their computers. This can help to significantly reduce your exposure to accidental data loss and restrict the ability of users to introduce software from outside of your network environment.

Removable storage devices, optical disk drives, and floppy disk drives can also be set to provide read-only access.

Using device control, you can also significantly reduce the risk of network bridging between a corporate network and a non-corporate network. The Block bridged mode is available for both wireless and modem types of device. The mode works by disabling either wireless or modem network adapters when an endpoint is connected to a physical network (typically through an

Ethernet connection). Once the endpoint is disconnected from the physical network, the wireless or modem network adapters are seamlessly re-enabled.

By default, device control is turned off and all devices are allowed.

If you want to enable device control for the first time, we recommend that you:

■

Select device types to control.

159

Sophos Enterprise Console

■

Detect devices without blocking them.

Use device control events to decide which device types to block and which, if any, devices should be exempt.

Detect and block devices or allow read-only access to storage devices.

For more information about the recommended settings for device control, see the Sophos

Enterprise Console policy setup guide.

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - device control right to configure a device control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

7.5.2 About device control events

When a device control event occurs, for example, a removable storage device has been blocked, the event is sent to Enterprise Console and can be viewed in the Device Control - Event Viewer dialog box.

In the Device Control - Event Viewer dialog box, you can use filters to display only the events you are interested in. You can also export the list of device control events to a file. For details, see

View device control events (page 196) and

Export the list of events to a file

(page 204).

You can use device control events to add exemptions for specific devices or device models to the device control policies. For more information about exempting devices, see

Exempt a device from a single policy

(page 164) or Exempt a device from all policies (page 163).

The number of computers with device control events over a specified threshold within the last seven days is displayed on the Dashboard. For information on how to set up the threshold, see

Configure the Dashboard

(page 56).

You can also set up alerts to be sent to your chosen recipients when a device control event has

occurred. For details, see Set up device control alerts and messages

(page 191).

7.5.3 What types of device can be controlled?

Device control enables you to block the following types of device: storage, network, short range, and media.

Storage

■

Removable storage devices (for example, USB flash drives, PC Card readers, and external hard disk drives)

Optical media drives (CD-ROM/DVD/Blu-ray drives)

Floppy disk drives

■

Secure removable storage devices (for example, hardware-encrypted USB flash drives)

For a list of supported secure removable storage devices, see Sophos support knowledgebase article 63102 ( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/63102.aspx

160

Help

Tip: Using the secure removable storage category, you can easily allow the use of supported secure removable storage devices while blocking other removable storage devices.

Network

■

Modems

Wireless (Wi-Fi interfaces, 802.11 standard)

For network interfaces, you can also select the Block bridged mode that helps to significantly reduce the risk of network bridging between a corporate network and a non-corporate network.

The mode works by disabling either wireless or modem network adapters when an endpoint is connected to a physical network (typically through an Ethernet connection). Once the endpoint is disconnected from the physical network, the wireless or modem network adapters are seamlessly re-enabled.

Short Range

■

Bluetooth interfaces

Infrared (IrDA infrared interfaces)

Device control blocks both internal and external devices and interfaces. For example, a policy which blocks Bluetooth interfaces will block both of the following:

■

The built-in Bluetooth interface in a computer

Any USB-based Bluetooth adapters plugged into the computer

Media

■

MTP/PTP

This includes mobile phones, tablets, digital cameras, media players and other devices that connect to a computer using Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) or Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP).

7.5.4 Select device types to control

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - device control right to edit a device control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Important: You should not block Wi-Fi connections on computers that are managed by Enterprise

Console via Wi-Fi.

1. Check which device control policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Device control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

161

Sophos Enterprise Console

3. In the Device control policy dialog box, on the Configuration tab, under Storage, select the type of storage device you want to control.

4. Click in the Status column next to the device type, and then click the drop-down arrow that appears. Select the type of access that you want to allow.

By default, devices have full access. For removable storage devices, optical disk drives and floppy disk drives, you can change that to “Blocked” or “Read only.” For secure removable storage devices, you can change that to “Blocked.”

5. Under Network, select the type of network device you want to block.

6. Click in the Status column next to the type of network device, and then click the drop-down arrow that appears.

■

Select “Blocked” if you want to block the device type.

Select “Block bridged” if you want to prevent network bridging between a corporate network and a non-corporate network. The device type will be blocked when an endpoint is connected to a physical network (typically through an Ethernet connection). Once the endpoint is disconnected from the physical network, the device type will be re-enabled.

7. Under Short Range, select the type of short-range device you want to block. In the Status column next to the device type, select “Blocked.”

Click OK.

7.5.5 Detect devices without blocking them

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - device control right to edit a device control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can detect devices without blocking them. This is useful if you intend to block devices in future, but want to detect and exempt the devices you need first.

To detect devices without blocking them, enable device control scanning in a device control policy and turn on the detection-only mode. Change the status of the devices you want to detect to

“Blocked.” This will generate events for devices used on endpoint computers when the policy would have been infringed, but the devices will not be blocked.

For information about viewing device control events, see

View device control events (page 196).

To detect devices without blocking them:

1. Check which device control policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Device control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Device control policy dialog box, on the Configuration tab, select Enable device

control scanning.

4. Select Detect but do not block devices.

162

Help

5. If you haven’t done so already, change the status of devices you want to detect to “Blocked.”

(For details, see

Select device types to control (page 161).)

Click OK.

7.5.6 Detect and block devices

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - device control right to edit a device control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

1. Check which device control policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Device control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Device control policy dialog box, on the Configuration tab, select the Enable device

control scanning check box.

4. Clear the Detect but do not block devices check box.

5. If you haven’t done so already, change the status of devices you want to block to “Blocked.”

(For details, see

Select device types to control (page 161).)

Click OK.

7.5.7 Exempt a device from all policies

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - device control right to edit a device control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can exempt a device from all policies, including the default one. That exception will then be added to all new policies you create.

You can exempt a device instance (“this device only”) or a device model (“all devices of this model”). Do not set exemptions at both the model and device instance level. If both are defined, the device instance level will take precedence.

To exempt a device from all device control policies:

1. On the Events menu, click Device Control Events.

The Device Control - Event Viewer dialog box appears.

2. If you want to display only certain events, in the Search criteria pane, set the filters as appropriate and click Search to display the events.

For more information, see View device control events

(page 196).

163

Sophos Enterprise Console

3. Select the entry for the device that you want to exempt from the policies, and then click Exempt

Device.

The Exempt device dialog box appears. Under Device details, you see the type, model, and

ID of the device. Under Exemption details, Scope, you see the words “All policies.”

Note: If there is no event for the device you want to exempt, for example, an integral CD or

DVD drive on an endpoint computer, go to the computer containing the device and enable the device in the Device Manager. (To access Device Manager, right-click My Computer, click

Manage, and then click Device Manager.) This will generate a new “block” event that will appear in the Device Control - Event Viewer dialog box. You can then exempt the device as described earlier in this step.

4. Select whether you want to exempt this device only or all devices of this model.

5. Select whether you want to allow full access or read-only access to the device.

6. In the Comment field, enter a comment, if you wish. For example, you can specify who requested to exempt the device.

7. Click OK.

7.5.8 Exempt a device from a single policy

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - device control right to edit a device control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can exempt a specific device from a device control policy.

To exempt a device from a policy:

1. Check which device control policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Device control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Device control policy dialog box, on the Configuration tab, click Add exemption.

The Device Control - Event Viewer dialog box appears.

4. If you want to display only certain events, in the Search criteria pane, set the filters as appropriate and click Search to display the events.

For more information, see View device control events

(page 196).

164

Help

5. Select the entry for the device that you want to exempt from the policy, and then click Exempt

Device.

The Exempt device dialog box appears. Under Device details, you see the type, model, and

ID of the device. Under Exemption details, Scope, you see the words “This policy only.”

Note: If there is no event for the device you want to exempt, for example, an integral CD or

DVD drive on an endpoint computer, go to the computer containing the device and enable the device in the Device Manager. (To access Device Manager, right-click My Computer, click

6. Select whether you want to exempt this device only or all devices of this model.

7. Select whether you want to allow full access or read-only access to the device.

8. In the Comment field, enter a comment, if you wish. For example, you can specify who requested to exempt the device.

9. Click OK.

7.5.9 View or edit the list of exempt devices

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - device control right to edit a device control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To view or edit the list of exempt devices:

1. Check which device control policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Device control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Device control policy dialog box, on the Configuration tab, select the type of device for which you want to view exemptions, for example, optical drive. Click View Exemptions.

The <Device type> exemptions dialog box is displayed. If an exemption is for all devices of that model, the Device ID field is blank.

4. If you want to edit the list of exempt devices, do one of the following:

■

If you want to add an exemption, click Add. For more information, see Exempt a device from a single policy

(page 164).

If you want to edit an exemption, select the exemption and click Edit. Edit the settings in the Exempt device dialog box as appropriate.

If you want to remove an exemption, select the exempt device and click Remove.

This will remove the exempt device from the policy you are editing. If you want to remove the device from other policies, repeat the steps in this task for each policy.

165

Sophos Enterprise Console

166

7.6 Configuring the full disk encryption policy

7.6.1 About full disk encryption

Full disk encryption protects the data on endpoint computers from being read or changed by unauthorized persons. Volumes on disks are encrypted transparently. Users do not need to decide what data is to be encrypted. Encryption and decryption are performed in the background.

By default, computers protected by full disk encryption run the Power-on Authentication (POA) before the operating system starts. After the user has logged on at the Power-on Authentication, the operating system starts and the user is logged on to Windows.

For convenient access, full disk encryption offers several features that aid IT operations on endpoint computers:

■

The Power-on Authentication can be temporarily deactivated for Wake on LAN, for example to facilitate patch management.

■

Normally, the first user who logs on to an endpoint computer after the encryption software has been installed, activates the Power-on Authentication. You can configure Windows accounts for logon to endpoint computers without activating the Power-on Authentication. This helps members of the IT team, for example, rollout operators. With the Windows accounts you specify in the full disk encryption policy as Power-on Authentication exceptions, they can log on to new computers for installation and verification tasks before end users log on and activate the

Power-on Authentication.

■

You can configure a POA user account to a member of the IT team to log on to endpoint computers for administrative tasks when the Power-on Authentication is already active.

For recovery on computers protected by full disk encryption, the following logon recovery methods are available:

■

Challenge/Response helps users who cannot log on to their computers or access encrypted data. A Challenge/Response procedure involves the assistance of a help desk. During the

Challenge/Response procedure, the user provides a challenge code generated on the endpoint computer to the help desk officer. The help desk officer then generates a response code that authorizes the user to perform a specific action on the computer. For more information, see

Recover access with Challenge/Response

(page 217).

With Local Self Help users who have forgotten their password can log on at their computer without the assistance of a help desk. Users log on by answering predefined questions in the

Power-on Authentication. Local Self Help reduces the number of help desk calls and allows help desk staff to concentrate on more complex support requests. For more information, see

Recover access with Local Self Help (page 218).

Important: Do not delete from the console computers that have been encrypted. Encryption recovery may not be possible in this case.

For more information about the recommended settings for full disk encryption, see the Sophos

Enterprise Console policy setup guide.

Help

For information about viewing events logged for computers protected by full disk encryption, see

View encryption events

(page 197).

7.6.2 Configure full disk encryption

Caution: If you are installing the Sophos encryption software for the first time, we strongly recommend that you enable and test each setting step-by-step.

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - full disk encryption right to edit a full disk encryption policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

By default, full disk encryption is not enabled.

To enable and configure full disk encryption:

1. Check which full disk encryption policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Full disk encryption. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Full disk encryption dialog box is displayed.

3. Under Volumes to encrypt, specify which volumes you want to encrypt by selecting the relevant check box(es):

■

Boot volumes

Non-boot volumes

4. Select Fast initial encryption (only encrypts used space on a drive) to reduce the time needed for initial encryption on endpoint computers.

Note: The fast initial encryption mode leads to a less secure state if a disk has been in use before encryption is applied. Unused sectors may still contain data.

5. Click OK.

When you assign the full disk encryption policy with these settings to a group of computers with the latest Sophos encryption software installed, the encryption process starts once the policy is received. The user can carry on working.

Note: To decrypt computers, clear the relevant options under Volumes to encrypt and assign the policy to the group of computers to be decrypted. Users are then allowed to manually decrypt the respective drives.

167

Sophos Enterprise Console

7.6.3 Configure logon

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - full disk encryption right to edit a full disk encryption policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

By default, computers that use a full disk encryption policy are protected by Power-on

Authentication.

To configure how users log on at the Power-on Authentication on their computers:

1. Check which full disk encryption policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Full disk encryption. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Full Disk Encryption dialog box is displayed.

3. Go to Power-on Authentication (POA).

4. Make sure that Enable Power-on Authentication is selected.

In addition, you can specify Windows accounts that can log on to endpoint computers for post-installation tasks without activating the Power-on Authentication: a) Click the Exceptions button next to the Enable Power-on Authentication field.

The Exceptions dialog box is displayed.

b) Click Add, enter the User name and the Computer or Domain Name of the relevant

Windows account(s) and click OK.

Note: In the fields User name and Computer or Domain Name you can use wildcards as the first or last character. In the User name field, the ? character is not allowed. In the

Computer or Domain Name field, the characters / \ [ ] : ; | = , + ? < > " are not allowed.

5. Select Fingerprint, to enable users to log on with Lenovo Fingerprint Reader.

6. To specify a user who can log on to the endpoint computer for administrative tasks when the

Power-on Authentication is already active, select POA user and click the Configure button.

a) In the Configure POA User dialog box, enter a logon name of your choice for the POA user in the User name field. You can freely define the logon name, with the following exceptions:

Note: In the User name field, the characters / \ [ ] : ; | = , + ? < > " * are not allowed.

Note: When setting up and entering logon names for POA users in Japanese, you have to use Romaji (Roman) characters to successfully log on at the POA.

b) Click the Set button next to the Password field.

168

Help

The POA User Password dialog box is displayed.

c) Enter and confirm a password for the POA user account and click OK.

Note: When setting up and entering passwords for POA users in Japanese, you have to use Romaji (Roman) characters to successfully log on at the POA.

d) In the Configure POA User dialog box, click OK.

7. To configure the temporary deactivation of the Power-on Authentication for Wake on LAN, select Temporary deactivation (for Wake on LAN).

For more information, see Configure temporary POA deactivation for Wake on LAN

(page 169)

8. In the Full Disk Encryption dialog box, click OK.

Note: If you clear Enable Power-on Authentication, you are prompted to confirm if you want to disable Power-on Authentication or not. For security reasons, we strongly recommend that you click No to keep Power-on Authentication enabled. Deactivating Power-on Authentication reduces system security to Windows logon security and increases the risk of unauthorized access to encrypted data.

7.6.4 Configure temporary POA deactivation for Wake on LAN

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - full disk encryption right to edit a full disk encryption policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

In the full disk encryption policy, the Enable Power-on Authentication field must be selected.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

By default, computers who use a full disk encryption policy are protected by Power-on

Authentication. You can temporarily deactivate the Power-on Authentication for Wake on LAN, for example to facilitate patch management. Wake on LAN is activated by running the scheduling script SGMCMDIntn.exe on the endpoint computer.

Note: Deactivating the POA - even for a limited number of boot processes - reduces the level of security of your system.

1. Check which full disk encryption policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Full disk encryption. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Full Disk Encryption dialog box is displayed.

3. Under Power-on Authentication (POA), make sure that the Enable Power-on Authentication field is selected.

4. Select Temporary deactivation (for Wake on LAN) and click the Configure button.

The Configure Temporary Deactivation dialog box is displayed.

169

Sophos Enterprise Console

5. In the Start and End fields, specify the start and end time for the Wake on LAN process.

6. Select Allow Windows logon during this time to permit Windows logon during Wake on

LAN, for example for software updates.

7. In the Auto logon limit field, specify how often the computer is restarted without authentication through the Power-on Authentication during Wake on LAN.

Note: We recommend that you allow three more restarts than necessary in case of any problems.

8. Click OK.

7.6.4.1 Wake on LAN example

For a software rollout planned between 03:00 am and 06:00 am on a specific date, two restarts are required. The local software rollout agent must be able to log on to Windows.

In the full disk encryption policy, under Temporary deactivation (for Wake on LAN) you configure the following settings:

Policy setting

Start

End

Allow Windows logon during this time

Auto logon limit

Value

Day before software rollout, 12:00 noon

Day of software rollout 06:00 am

Yes

As the auto logon limit is set to 5 the endpoint computer starts 5 times without authentication through POA.

Note: In this example, the autologon limit is set to 5 as we recommend that you allow three more restarts than necessary in case of any problems.

By setting the start time to 12:00 noon on the day before the software rollout, you make sure that the scheduling script SGMCMDIntn.exe is started in time and that the Wake on LAN process starts no later than 03:00 am on the day of the software rollout.

The following two commands have to be created for the scheduling script SGCMDIntn.exe by the software rollout team:

■

Start on the day before software rollout, 12:15 am, SGMCMDIntn.exe -WOLstart

Start on the day after the software rollout, 09:00 am, SGMCMDIntn.exe -WOLstop

The date of the software rollout script is defined as the day of the rollout, 03:00 am. Wake on LAN can explicitly be deactivated again at the end of the script with SGMCMDIntn.exe -WOLstop.

All endpoint computers that log on before the date specified for Start and connect to the rollout servers receive the new policy and the scheduling commands.

170

Help

Any endpoint computer on which the schedule triggers the command SGMMCMDIntn -WOLStart between the day before the rollout at 12:00 noon and the day of the rollout at 06:00 am falls within the WOL time interval. Therefore Wake on LAN is activated.

7.6.5 Configure Challenge/Response

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - full disk encryption right to edit a full disk encryption policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

In the full disk encryption policy, the Enable Power-on Authentication field must be selected.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Challenge/Response helps users who cannot log on to their computers or access encrypted data.

A Challenge/Response procedure involves the assistance of a help desk.

To configure Challenge/Response:

1. Check which full disk encryption policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Full disk encryption. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Full Disk Encryption dialog box is displayed.

3. Under Power-on Authentication (POA), make sure that the Enable Power-on Authentication field is selected.

4. Under Logon recovery methods, make sure that Challenge/Response (help desk needed) is selected.

5. Click the Configure button next to Challenge/Response (help desk needed).

The Configure Challenge/Response Welcome Text dialog box is displayed.

6. In the text field, you can enter text that is displayed when the user initiates a

Challenge/Response procedure in the Power-on Authentication. For example: "Please contact the help desk on the phone number 1234-56789." After you have entered the text click OK.

7. Click OK.

7.6.6 Configure Local Self Help

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - full disk encryption right to edit a full disk encryption policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

■

To configure global settings for Local Self Help, you must have the right Global encryption

settings.

In the full disk encryption policy, the Enable Power-on Authentication field must be selected.

171

Sophos Enterprise Console

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

With Local Self Help, users who have forgotten their password can log on to their computers without the assistance of a help desk. Users log on by answering predefined questions in the

Power-on Authentication.

To configure Local Self Help:

1. Check which full disk encryption policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Full disk encryption. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Full Disk Encryption dialog box is displayed.

3. Under Power-on Authentication (POA), make sure that the Enable Power-on Authentication field is selected.

4. Under Logon recovery methods, select Local Self Help (without help desk) and click OK.

5. To configure further settings for Local Self Help, click Global Encryption Settings.

The Global Encryption Settings dialog box is displayed.

6. Under Local Self Help, configure the following settings: a) In the The user has to answer: drop-down list, select how many questions users must answer correctly to log on.

b) To allow users to define their own questions, select Allow users to define their own

questions.

7. Click OK.

7.6.7 Configure global encryption settings

If you use role-based administration, you must have the right Global encryption settings.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Besides the settings in full disk encryption policies you can configure global encryption settings: display settings, global settings for Local Self Help and logging settings.

To configure global encryption settings:

1. In the Policies pane, double-click Full disk encryption. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Full Disk Encryption dialog box is displayed.

2. Click Global Encryption Settings.

The Global Encryption Settings dialog box is displayed.

172

Help

3. Under Display, configure the following settings: a) To show the full disk encryption icon in the Windows notification area on endpoint computers for quick and easy access to all user functions, select Icon in Windows notification area.

b) To show the encryption icon in Windows Explorer on endpoint computers for encrypted drives, select Encryption status in Windows Explorer.

c) To display your chosen text before the user logs on at the Power-on Authentication, select

Legal notice when the computer starts. To configure the text to be displayed (for example legal notices required by law or information for anyone who finds a lost laptop) click

Configure, enter the required text in the Configure Legal Notice dialog box and click OK.

4. Under Local Self Help, you can define global settings for the Local Self Help logon recovery method. For more information, see

Configure Local Self Help (page 171).

5. Click OK.

7.6.8 Back up company certificate

If you use role-based administration, you must have the right Global encryption settings.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Certificates are used to secure the communication between the endpoint computers and the database. When encryption is installed the company certificate is used to recover a corrupt database. The company certificate is backed up during Enterprise Console installation, but you can back it up to different locations any time.

Note: Besides the company certificate there is a second type of certificate, the MSO certificate.

This certificate is used to recover a corrupt server. The MSO certificate can only be backed up during Enterprise Console installation. Make sure that you do not lose this backup.

To back up the company certificate:

1. On the Tools menu, click Manage encryption and select Backup company certificate.

2. In Backup company certificate click Export.

3. Select a location for the backup store and enter and confirm a password to encrypt the store.

take a note of the password.

7.7 Configuring the tamper protection policy

7.7.1 About tamper protection

Tamper protection enables you to prevent unauthorized users (local administrators and users with limited technical knowledge) and known malware from uninstalling Sophos security software or disabling it through the Sophos Endpoint Security and Control interface.

Note: Tamper protection is not designed to protect against users with extensive technical knowledge. Nor does it protect against malware which has been specifically designed to subvert the operating system to avoid detection. This type of malware is only detected by scanning for threats and suspicious behavior. (For more information, see

About the anti-virus and HIPS policy

(page 86).)

173

Sophos Enterprise Console

After you enable tamper protection and create a tamper-protection password, a member of the

SophosAdministrator group on the endpoint who does not know the password will not be able to:

■

Re-configure on-access scanning or suspicious behavior detection settings in Sophos Endpoint

Security and Control.

Disable tamper protection.

■

Uninstall the Sophos Endpoint Security and Control components (Sophos Anti-Virus, Sophos

Client Firewall, Sophos AutoUpdate, or Sophos Remote Management System).

Uninstall Sophos Disk Encryption.

If you want to enable SophosAdministrators to perform these tasks, you must provide them with the tamper protection password so that they can authenticate themselves with tamper protection first.

Tamper protection does not affect members of the SophosUser and SophosPowerUser groups.

When tamper protection is enabled, they will be able to perform all tasks that they are usually authorized to perform, without the need to enter the tamper protection password.

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - tamper protection right to configure a tamper protection policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Tamper protection events

When a tamper protection event occurs, for example, an unauthorized attempt to uninstall Sophos

Anti-Virus from an endpoint computer has been prevented, the event is written in the event log that can be viewed from Enterprise Console. For details, see

View tamper protection events (page

198).

There are two types of tamper protection event:

■

Successful tamper protection authentication events, showing the name of the authenticated user and the time of authentication.

■

Failed attempts to tamper, showing the name of the targeted Sophos product or component, the time of the attempt, and the details of the user responsible for the attempt.

7.7.2 Turn tamper protection on or off

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - tamper protection right to configure a tamper protection policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

174

Help

To turn tamper protection on or off:

1. Check which tamper protection policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Tamper protection. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Tamper Protection Policy dialog box, select or clear the Enable tamper protection check box.

If you want to enable tamper protection for the first time, click Set under the Password box.

In the Tamper Protection Password dialog box, enter and confirm a password.

Tip: We recommend that the password should be at least eight characters long and contain mixed-case letters and numbers.

7.7.3 Change the tamper protection password

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - tamper protection right to configure a tamper protection policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To change the tamper protection password:

1. Check which tamper protection policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Tamper protection. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Tamper Protection Policy dialog box, click Change under the Password box. In the

Tamper Protection Password dialog box, enter and confirm a new password.

Tip: The password should be at least eight characters long and contain mixed-case letters and numbers.

7.8 Configuring the patch policy

7.8.1 About patch assessment

Enterprise Console enables you to check that your computers have the most up-to-date security patches installed.

175

Sophos Enterprise Console

SophosLabs provides ratings that help you determine the most critical security patch issues so that you can resolve them quickly. SophosLabs ratings take the latest exploits into account and therefore may differ from a vendor's severity level.

Before using patch, you must install the patch agent on your networked computers so that they can perform patch assessments and communicate status to Enterprise Console. You can install this using the Protect Computers Wizard. See

Protect computers automatically

(page 52).

This section assumes that you have installed the patch agent.

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - patch right to configure a patch policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information about role-based administration, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

7.8.2 How does patch assessment work?

Patch assessment is disabled in the default policy. Once patch assessment is enabled, computers begin an assessment. This can take several minutes. Subsequent assessments occur at the interval set in policy, which is daily by default.

Note: If computers run an assessment before Enterprise Console has downloaded patch data from Sophos for the first time, the Patch Event viewer displays no results. The download can take several hours. To check if this has completed, see the Patch updates field in Events > Patch

Assessment Events.

If the patch agent cannot update from Enterprise Console, for any reason, it will continue to assess computers against the previously downloaded patch detections.

Computers are only assessed for security patches on software that is installed on the computer.

If a new patch is released that supersedes an older patch, then patch assessment will no longer check for the presence of the older patch. Only the new patch will be assessed.

7.8.2.1 What are superseded patches?

If a vendor releases a patch that replaces an earlier patch, the new patch is called a superseding patch. The patch it replaces is referred to as the superseded patch.

Sophos recommends you install the superseding patch to keep your computers up-to-date.

Example: If you search for virusX and see that the fix for the virus is available in patch P01, which is superseded by patch P02, Sophos recommends you install P02.

7.8.3 About patch assessment events

When a patch assessment event occurs, for example, a computer is missing a patch, the event is sent to Enterprise Console and can be viewed in the Patch Assessment - Event Viewer.

In the Patch Assessment - Event Viewer, you can use filters to display only the events you are interested in. You can also export the list of patch assessment events to a file. For details, see

View patch assessment events

(page 200) and Export the list of events to a file (page 204).

176

Help

7.8.4 Turn patch assessment on or off

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - patch right to configure a patch policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To turn patch assessment on or off:

1. Check which patch policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Patch. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Patch Policy dialog box, select or clear the Enable patch assessments check box, and click OK.

7.8.5 Select the patch assessment interval

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - patch right to configure a patch policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To set the patch assessment interval:

1. Check which patch policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Patch. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Patch Policy dialog box, click the drop-down arrow of the Assess for missing patches field, and select the appropriate interval. Click OK.

To assess at this interval, patch assessment must be enabled in the policy.

7.9 Configuring the web control policy

7.9.1 About the web control policy

By default, the web control policy is turned off in Enterprise Console. Selecting Enable web

control allows you to choose one of the following policy options:

■

Inappropriate Website Control: This basic web control option includes 14 essential site categories. It is designed to protect users from visiting websites for which your organization

177

Sophos Enterprise Console

■ could be legally liable. For more information, see

About Inappropriate Website Control

(page

178).

Full Web Control: This option applies a comprehensive, full-featured policy that covers more than 50 website categories. It requires a Sophos Web Appliance, Sophos Management

Appliance, or Sophos UTM appliance (version 9.2 or later) to synchronize with endpoints to

distribute policy updates and collect web activity data. For more information, see About Full

Web Control (page 182).

When using Inappropriate Website Control, you can either edit an existing web control policy, or create a new policy. For more information, see

Create a policy

(page 38). You can set the various site categories to “Block,” “Warn,” or “Allow.” Web control status and web events are displayed in Enterprise Console. For more information about web events, see

View web events

(page 202).

If, instead, you are using the Full Web Control policy, Enterprise Console requires the location of the Web, UTM, or Management Appliance from which the full web-filtering policy is configured, together with a shared key to secure communication between the appliance and Enterprise

Console. When the Full Web Control policy is selected, most of the reporting and monitoring is shifted to the appliance; however, websites scanned and assessed by Sophos Endpoint Security and Control's live URL-filtering (

Web Protection (page 106)) are displayed in Enterprise Console

as web events.

For more information about web control, see the Endpoint web control overview guide .

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - web control right to edit a web control policy.

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information about role-based administration, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

7.9.2 Inappropriate Website Control

7.9.2.1 About Inappropriate Website Control

Note: This feature is not included with all licenses. If you want to use it, you might need to customize your license. For more information, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/products/complete/comparison.aspx

With this basic form of website control, you can filter the web activity of users, based on 14 website categories. There is a default action for each category (described in

About website categories

(page 179)), but, if necessary, you can select a different action, as described in Select a website category action (page 181).

Users can be blocked from visiting restricted websites. An event is triggered that is shown to the user and sent to Enterprise Console.

Alternatively, users can be warned by means of a notification when visiting controlled websites; even if the user does not proceed, a warning event is triggered. If the user proceeds and views a site despite the warning, a second event is triggered and sent to Enterprise Console.

Note: Although HTTP and HTTPS sites are both filtered in all supported web browsers, user notifications are different, depending on whether the URL is HTTP or HTTPS. With HTTP sites, users see notification pages for sites in categories set to “Block” or “Warn.” For HTTPS, users

178

Help only see “Block” notifications, and they are displayed as a balloon tip in the Windows System

Tray. HTTPS “Warn” actions are neither displayed to the user nor are they logged. Instead, users are allowed to continue to the requested page, and the event is logged as a “Proceed” in Enterprise

Console.

If you select the “Allow” action for a website category, users can access all websites within this category, unless website exceptions are specified. “Allow” events are not logged when

Inappropriate Website Control is selected.

Note: Allowed sites are still scanned and assessed by Sophos Endpoint Security and Control's live URL-filtering (Web protection) feature.

7.9.2.2 Turn on Inappropriate Website Control

Perform the following steps to turn on web control in Enterprise Console and use Inappropriate

Website Control.

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - web control right to edit a web control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information about role-based administration, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

To turn on Inappropriate Website Control:

1. Check which web control policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

For more information, see Check which policies a group uses (page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Web control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Web Control Policy dialog box is displayed.

3. On the General tab, select Enable web control.

The Inappropriate Website Control policy is displayed. Although there is a default action for

each of the 14 site categories, you can set a different action. For more information, see Select a website category action

(page 181).

7.9.2.3 About website categories

By selecting Inappropriate Website Control, you can configure 14 website categories, controlling the internet content that users can access through a web browser. For more information, see

About Inappropriate Website Control

(page 178).

The website categories described below are filtered. The default action for each category is indicated in brackets. Each category can be configured as Block, Warn, or Allow. Selecting

Allow gives users access to all sites within that category. To change the action, see

Select a website category action (page 181).

■

Adult Sexually Explicit (Block): This category includes sites for adult products including sex toys, CD-ROMs, and videos; child pornography and pedophilia (including the IWF list); adult services including video-conferencing, escort services, and strip clubs; erotic stories and textual descriptions of sexual acts; explicit cartoons and animation; online groups, including newsgroups and forums that are sexually explicit in nature; sexually-oriented or erotic sites with full or

179

Sophos Enterprise Console partial nudity; depictions or images of sexual acts, including with animals or inanimate objects used in a sexual manner; sexually exploitive or sexually violent text or graphics; bondage, fetishes, genital piercing; naturist sites that feature nudity; and erotic or fetish photography that depicts nudity.

Note: We do not include sites regarding sexual health, breast cancer, or sexually transmitted diseases (except those with graphic examples).

■

Alcohol and Tobacco (Warn): This category includes sites that promote or distribute alcohol or tobacco products for free or for a charge.

Anonymizer Proxies (Block): This category includes sites for remote proxies or anonymous surfing, search engine caches that circumvent filtering, and web-based translation sites that circumvent filtering.

Criminal Activity (Block): This category includes sites for advocating, instructing, or giving advice on performing illegal acts; tips on evading law enforcement; and lock-picking and burglary techniques.

Gambling (Warn): This category includes sites of online gambling or lottery websites that invite the use of real or virtual money; information or advice for placing wagers, participating in lotteries, gambling, or running numbers; virtual casinos and offshore gambling ventures; sports picks and betting pools; and virtual sports and fantasy leagues that offer large rewards or request significant wagers.

Hacking (Block): This category includes sites for the promotion, instruction, or advice on the questionable or illegal use of equipment and software for purpose of hacking passwords, creating viruses, gaining access to other computers and computerized communication systems; sites that provide instruction or work-arounds for filtering software; cracked software and information sites; warez; pirated software and multimedia download sites; and computer crime sites.

Illegal Drugs (Block): This category includes sites for recipes, instructions or kits for manufacturing or growing illicit substances for purposes other than industrial usage; glamorizing, encouraging, or instructing on the use of or masking the use of alcohol, tobacco, illegal drugs, or other substances that are illegal to minors; information on "legal highs", including glue sniffing, misuse of prescription drugs, or abuse of other legal substances; distributing illegal drugs free or for a charge; and displaying, selling, or detailing the use of drug paraphernalia.

Intolerance and Hate (Block) : This category includes sites that advocate or incite degradation or attack of specified populations or institutions based on associations such as religion, race, nationality, gender, age, disability, or sexual orientation; sites that promote a political or social agenda that is supremacist in nature and exclusionary of others based on their race, religion, nationality, gender, age, disability, or sexual orientation; holocaust revisionist or denial sites and other revisionist sites that encourage hate; coercion or recruitment for membership in a gang

or cult

; militancy and extremist sites; and flagrantly insensitive or offensive material, including those with a lack of recognition or respect for opposing opinions and beliefs.

Note: We do not include news, historical, or press incidents that may include the above criteria

(except in graphic examples).

A gang is defined as a group whose primary activities are the commission of felonious criminal acts, which has a common name or identifying sign or symbol, and whose members individually or collectively engage in criminal activity in the name of the group.

A cult is defined as a group whose followers have been deceptively and manipulatively recruited and retained through undue influence such that followers' personalities and behavior

180

Help are altered; a group in which leadership is all-powerful, ideology is totalistic, and the will of the individual is subordinate to the group; and a group that sets itself outside of society.

■

Phishing and Fraud (Block): This category includes sites involved in phishing and telephone scams, service theft advice sites, and plagiarism and cheating sites, including the sale of research papers.

Spam URLs (Block): This category includes URLs found in spam, particularly on these topics: computing, finance and stocks, entertainment, games, health and medicine, humor and novelties, personal and dating, products and services, shopping, and travel.

Spyware (Block): This category includes sites that provide or promote information gathering or tracking that is unknown to, or done without the explicit consent of, the end user or the organization, including sites that carry malicious executables or viruses, third party monitoring, and other unsolicited commercial software, spyware, and malware "phone home" destinations.

■

Tasteless and Offensive (Warn): This category includes sites that feature offensive or violent language, including through jokes, comics, or satire, and excessive use of profanity or obscene gesticulation.

Violence (Warn): This category includes sites portraying, describing or advocating physical assault against humans, animals, or institutions; depicting torture, mutilation, gore, or horrific death; advocating, encouraging, or depicting self-endangerment, or suicide, including through eating disorders or addictions; instructions, recipes, or kits for making bombs or other harmful or destructive devices; sites promoting terrorism; and excessively violent sports or games, including videos and online games.

Note: We do not block news, historical, or press incidents that may include the above criteria, except those that include graphic examples.

■

Weapons (Warn): This category includes sites with online purchasing or ordering information, including lists of prices and dealer locations; any page or site predominantly containing, or providing links to, content related to the sale of guns, weapons, ammunition or poisonous substances; displaying or detailing the use of guns, weapons, ammunition or poisonous substances; and clubs which offer training on machine guns, automatics, other assault weapons, and sniper training.

Note: Weapons are defined as something (as a club, knife, or gun) used to injure, defeat, or destroy.

7.9.2.4 Select a website category action

With web control turned on and the Inappropriate Website Control policy selected, you can configure the action for each website category. You can also create a new policy that is based on the default policy. For more information, see

Create a policy (page 38).

181

Sophos Enterprise Console

To select a site category action:

1. On the General tab, on the drop-down list next to the site category or categories that you want to configure, select one of the following:

■

Block: Prevents users from viewing sites in this category. If it is an HTTP web page, a block notification is displayed to the user, explaining why the site was blocked. If it is an

HTTPS page, a balloon tip is displayed to the users in the Windows System Tray.

Warn: Warns users that they are at risk of violating their organization's web use policy, but allows them to proceed. If it is an HTTP page, a warn notification is displayed to users, cautioning them about proceeding to the site. If it is an HTTPS page, the user does not receive a notification, and is allowed to continue to the website. The event is logged as a

“Proceed” in Enterprise Console.

Allow: Lets users view sites in this category. The event is not logged.

2. Click OK.

7.9.2.5 Manage website exceptions

If you have selected the Inappropriate Website Control policy, you can create exceptions to the “Block” and “Warn” actions. You can exempt websites from filtering by adding them to the

“Websites to Allow” or “Websites to Block” list. Entries can take the form of IP addresses and domain names. You can also edit existing website entries, and remove websites from a list.

Note: If there are conflicting or overlapping entries in the 'Block' and 'Allow' lists, the entries in the Block list will always take precedence. For example, if the same IP address is included in the

Block list and the Allow list, the website is blocked. Furthermore, if a domain is included in the

Block list, but a subdomain of that same domain is included in the Allow list, the Allow entry is ignored, and the domain and all of its subdomains are blocked.

To add a website exception:

1. On the Website Exceptions tab, click the Add button next to the Websites to Allow or

Websites to Block text box.

2. In the Add Website to Allow dialog box, click Domain name, IP address with subnet mask, or IP address. Examples of each format are displayed above the associated text box.

3. In the text box, enter the domain name or IP address for the website you want to allow or block.

4. Click OK.

If you want to edit a website or remove it from a list, select the website, and click Edit or Remove accordingly.

7.9.3 Full Web Control

7.9.3.1 About Full Web Control

182

Help

If you have a Sophos Web Appliance, Sophos Management Appliance, or Sophos UTM appliance

(version 9.2 or later) you can distribute an appliance-based policy to your users by way of Enterprise

Console.

Endpoint computers communicate with Enterprise Console in the same way as when the

Inappropriate Website Control policy is selected, but the web-filtering rules and web activity logs are synchronized with the appliance that you specify. The policy is stored on endpoint computers and applied, based on the latest Sophos data.

Users are blocked, warned or allowed, according to the web control policy. You can view user activity data using the Reports and Search features on the Web Appliance or Management

Appliance, or Logging & Reporting > Web Protection option on the UTM appliance. Web control events are all recorded on the appliance; however, sites scanned and assessed by Sophos

Endpoint Security and Control's live URL-filtering (Web protection) are recorded as web events in Enterprise Console.

Note: Although HTTP and HTTPS sites are both filtered in all supported web browsers, in a Web

Appliance or Management Appliance user notifications are different, depending on whether the

URL is HTTP or HTTPS. With HTTP sites, users see notification pages for sites in categories set to “Block” or “Warn.” For HTTPS, users only see “Block” notifications, and they are displayed as a balloon tip in the Windows System Tray. HTTPS “Warn” actions are not displayed to users, nor are they logged. Instead, users are allowed to continue to the requested page, and it is logged as a “Proceed” event in the Web Appliance or Management Appliance.

UTM appliance uses a central cloud-based service called Sophos LiveConnect for protecting and monitoring endpoint computers. LiveConnect allows you to always manage all of your endpoints, whether they are on your local network, at remote sites, or with traveling users—policy updates are distributed to users, and reporting data from endpoint computers is uploaded, even when users are not connected from within the network.

When using Web Appliance or Management Appliance, endpoints can communicate with the appliance either directly or through Sophos LiveConnect.

With Full Web Control selected, a full-featured policy takes effect. Full Web Control offers the following benefits over basic web control, depending on the appliance you use:

■

Users are warned or blocked, based on over 50 categories of URLs.

Differentiated “Special Hours” policies can be applied.

■

Numerous additional policies can be used as per-user or per-group exceptions to the default and Special Hours policies.

Detailed logs and reports are available on the Web Appliance, Management Appliance, or

UTM appliance.

LiveConnect allows distribution of policy updates and uploading of report data, even when users connect remotely.

Users can submit feedback regarding the handling of blocked URLs.

Customized notification pages that include your logo, and text that is specific to your organization, can be displayed to users. For more information, see the Sophos Web Appliance documentation.

Users are automatically restricted from browsing to inappropriate sites from within popular search engines when SafeSearch is enabled.

183

Sophos Enterprise Console

For more information on configuring a full Web Appliance policy, see the Sophos Web Appliance documentation available at http://wsa.sophos.com/docs/wsa/ .

The UTM appliance documentation is available at http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/documentation/sophos-utm.aspx

7.9.3.2 Turn on Full Web Control

Note: The following procedure assumes that you have a Sophos Web Appliance, Sophos

Management Appliance, or Sophos UTM appliance (version 9.2 or later) that is configured, fully functioning, and using endpoint web control.

By default, the web control policy is turned off. Perform the following steps to enable web control and use the Full Web Control policy.

Note: If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - web control right to edit a web control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information about role-based administration, see About roles and sub-estates (page

20).

To turn on Full Web Control:

1. Check which web control policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

For more information, see Check which policies a group uses (page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Web control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Web Control Policy dialog box is displayed.

3. On the General tab, click Enable web control.

4. Select Full Web Control.

5. In the Settings panel, enter the Appliance Hostname and Security Key for Policy Exchange.

■

For a Web Appliance or Management Appliance, you must provide a fully qualified hostname.

The security key must match the one that is displayed on the Endpoint Web Control page of the appliance.

For UTM, enter the Hostname and the Shared Key of the Sophos LiveConnect broker used by UTM. They can be found in the UTM administrative interface WebAdmin, on the Endpoint

Protection > Computer Management > Advanced tab, in the Sophos LiveConnect –

Registration section under SEC Information.

For more information, see the Sophos Web Appliance documentation available at http://wsa.sophos.com/docs/wsa/ or UTM appliance documentation available at http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/documentation/sophos-utm.aspx

6. Optionally, select Block browsing if the website category cannot be determined. If an endpoint computer is unable to retrieve data about website categorization, URLs that cannot be categorized are blocked until the service is restored.

This check box is not selected by default, which allows users to continue browsing if the categorization service fails.

184

Help

7. Click OK.

Enterprise Console reconfigures endpoint computers to communicate with the Web Appliance,

Management Appliance, or Sophos LiveConnect broker used by UTM.

185

Sophos Enterprise Console

8 Setting up alerts and messages

8.1 About alerts and messages

There are several alerting methods used in Enterprise Console.

■

Alerts displayed in the console

If an item that requires attention is found on a computer, or an error has occurred, Sophos

Endpoint Security and Control sends an alert to Enterprise Console. The alert is displayed in the computer list. For more information about dealing with such alerts, see

Deal with alerts about detected items

(page 60).

These alerts are always displayed. You do not need to set them up.

■

Events displayed in the console

When an application control, firewall, patch assessment, web, data control, device control, encryption or tamper protection event occurs on an endpoint computer, for example, an application has been blocked by the firewall, that event is sent to Enterprise Console and can be viewed in the respective event viewer.

■

Alerts and messages sent by the console to your chosen recipients

By default, when an item is found on a computer, a message is displayed on the computer desktop and an entry is added to the Windows event log. When an application control, data control, or device control event occurs, a message is displayed on the computer desktop.

Note: Optional user-defined desktop messages are not displayed on computers running

Windows 8.

You can also set up email alerts or SNMP messages for administrators.

Note: If you want to use authenticated SMTP for email alerts, see Sophos support knowledgebase article 113780

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/113780.aspx

This section describes how to set up alerts to be sent to your chosen recipients.

8.2 Set up software subscription alerts

If you use role-based administration, you must have the System configuration right to perform

this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

Enterprise Console displays alerts raised by the update manager in the Alerts column in the

Update managers view. If you subscribed to a fixed version of software, an alert will be displayed when that version is nearing retirement or is retired. An alert will also be displayed if your product license has changed.

186

Help

If you are subscribed to a fixed version of software and have chosen to Automatically upgrade

fixed version software when it is no longer supported by Sophos, your subscription will be upgraded automatically.

If you have chosen not to be upgraded automatically, you will be instructed to change your subscription.

Important: Running unsupported software leaves you unprotected against new security threats.

We recommend that you upgrade to a supported version as soon as possible.

You can also set up email alerts to be sent to your chosen recipients when the product version you are subscribed to is nearing retirement or is retired.

1. On the Tools menu, select Configure email alerts.

The Configure email alerts dialog box is displayed.

2. If SMTP settings have not been configured, or if you want to view or change the settings, click

Configure.

In the Configure SMTP settings dialog box, enter the details as described below.

a) In the Server address text box, type the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.

b) In the Sender text box, type an email address to which bounces and non-delivery reports can be sent.

c) Click Test to test the connection.

3. In the Recipients panel, click Add.

The Add a new email alert recipient dialog box appears.

4. In the Email address field, enter the address of your recipient.

5. In the Language field, select the language in which email alerts should be sent.

6. In the Subscriptions pane, select “Software subscriptions” email alerts you want to send to this recipient. There are three alerts you can subscribe to:

■

A software subscription includes a version of a product that is shortly to be retired at Sophos.

A software subscription includes a version of a product which is no longer available.

This alert is sent if the product you are subscribed to has been retired, or your license has changed and the new license does not include that product.

■

The Sophos license information has been updated. Product features may have changed.

8.3 Set up anti-virus and HIPS email alerts

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can have email alerts sent to particular users if a virus, suspicious behavior, an unwanted application or an error is encountered on any of the computers in a group.

187

Sophos Enterprise Console

188

Important: Mac OS X computers can send email alerts to only one address.

1. In the Policies pane, double-click the anti-virus and HIPS policy you want to change.

2. In the Anti-virus and HIPS policy dialog box, click Messaging.

3. In the Messaging dialog box, go to the Email alerting tab and select Enable email alerting.

4. In the Messages to send panel, select the events for which you want to send email alerts.

Note: The Suspicious behavior detection, Suspicious file detection, Adware and PUA

detection and cleanup, and Other errors settings apply only to Windows computers.

5. In the Recipients panel, click Add or Remove to add or remove, respectively, email addresses to which email alerts should be sent. Click Rename to change an email address you have added.

Important: Mac OS X computers will send messages only to the first recipient in the list.

6. Click Configure SMTP to change the settings for the SMTP server and the language of the email alerts.

7. In the Configure SMTP settings dialog box, enter the details as described below.

■

In the SMTP server text box, type the host name or IP address of the SMTP server. Click

Test to send a test email alert.

In the SMTP sender address text box, type an email address to which bounces and non-delivery reports can be sent.

■

In the SMTP reply-to address text box, you can type in the text box an email address to which replies to email alerts can be sent. Email alerts are sent from an unattended mailbox.

In the Language panel, click the drop-down arrow, and select the language in which email alerts should be sent.

8.4 Set up anti-virus and HIPS SNMP messaging

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can have SNMP messages sent to particular users if a virus or error is encountered on any of the computers in the group.

Note: These settings apply only to Windows computers.

1. In the Policies pane, double-click the anti-virus and HIPS policy you want to change.

2. In the Anti-virus and HIPS policy dialog box, click Messaging.

3. In the Messaging dialog box, go to the SNMP messaging tab and select Enable SNMP

messaging.

4. In the Messages to send panel, select the types of event for which you want Sophos Endpoint

Security and Control to send SNMP messages.

5. In the SNMP trap destination text box, enter the IP address of the recipient.

6. In the SNMP community name text box, enter the SNMP community name.

Help

8.5 Configure anti-virus and HIPS desktop messaging

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

By default, desktop messages are displayed on the computer on which a virus, suspicious item or potentially unwanted application is found. You can configure these messages.

1. In the Policies pane, double-click the anti-virus and HIPS policy you want to change.

2. In the Anti-virus and HIPS policy dialog box, click Messaging.

3. In the Messaging dialog box, click the Desktop messaging tab.

By default, Enable desktop messaging and all the options in the Messages to send panel are selected. Edit these settings, if appropriate.

Note: The Suspicious behavior detection, Suspicious file detection, and Adware and

PUA detection settings apply only to Windows computers.

4. In the User-defined message text box, you can type a message that will be added to the end of the standard message.

Note: User-defined desktop messages are not displayed on computers running Windows 8.

8.6 Set up application control alerts and messages

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - application control right to configure an application control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

You can send messages to particular users when a controlled application is found.

1. In the Policies pane, double-click the application control policy you want to change.

2. In the Application control policy dialog box, go to the Messaging tab.

In the Messaging panel, the Enable desktop messaging check box is enabled by default.

When an unauthorized controlled application is detected by on-access scan and blocked, a desktop message will be displayed to the user informing them that the application has been blocked.

3. In the Message text box, type a message that will be added to the end of the standard desktop message.

Note: User-defined desktop messages are not displayed on computers running Windows 8.

4. If you want to send email alerts about detected controlled applications, select the Enable email

alerting check box.

189

Sophos Enterprise Console

5. Select the Enable SNMP messaging check box, if you want to send SNMP messages.

Note: Your anti-virus and HIPS policy settings determine email and SNMP messaging configuration and recipients. For more information, see

Set up anti-virus and HIPS SNMP messaging

(page 188).

8.7 Set up data control alerts and messages

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - data control right to configure a data control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Enterprise Console uses events and messages to report when the transfer of sensitive data is detected or blocked.

For information about data control policies and events, see

About data control

(page 144).

When data control is enabled, the following events and messages are logged or displayed by default:

■

Data control events are logged on the workstation.

■

Data control events are sent to Enterprise Console and can be viewed in the Data Control -

Event Viewer. (To open the event viewer, on the Events menu, click Data Control Events.)

Note: Each computer can send to Enterprise Console a maximum of 50 data control events per hour.

■

The number of computers with data control events over a specified threshold within the last seven days is displayed on the Dashboard.

■

Desktop messages are displayed on the workstation.

You can also configure Enterprise Console to send the following messages:

Email alerts

SNMP messages

An email message is sent to the recipients that you specify.

An SNMP message is sent to the recipients specified in your anti-virus and HIPS policy settings.

To set up data control messaging:

1. Check which data control policy is used by the group or groups of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Data control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

The Data control policy dialog box is displayed.

190

Help

3. In the Data control policy dialog box, go to the Messaging tab. Desktop messaging is enabled by default and Include matched rules in messages is selected.

4. Type messages that will be added to the standard messages for user confirmation of file transfer and for blocked file transfer, if you wish.

You can enter a maximum of 100 characters. You can also add an HTML link to the message, for example, <a href="http://www.sophos.com">About Sophos</a>.

Note: User-defined desktop messages are not displayed on computers running Windows 8.

5. To enable email alerting, select the Enable email alerting check box. In the Email recipients field, enter the email addresses of the recipients. Separate each address with a semicolon (;).

6. To enable SNMP messaging, select the Enable SNMP messaging check box.

The email server and SNMP trap settings are configured via the anti-virus and HIPS policy.

8.8 Set up device control alerts and messages

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - device control right to edit a device control policy.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

Enterprise Console uses events and messages to report when a controlled device is detected or blocked.

For information about device control policies and events, see About device control (page 159).

When device control is enabled, the following events and messages are logged or displayed by default:

■

Device control events are logged on the workstation.

■

Device control events are sent to Enterprise Console and can be viewed in the Device Control

- Event Viewer. (To open the event viewer, on the Events menu, click Device Control Events.)

The number of computers with device control events over a specified threshold within the last seven days is displayed on the Dashboard.

■

Desktop messages are displayed on the workstation.

You can also configure Enterprise Console to send the following messages:

Email alerts

SNMP messages

An email message is sent to the recipients that you specify.

An SNMP message is sent to the recipients specified in your anti-virus and HIPS policy settings.

To set up device control messaging:

1. Check which device control policy is used by the group(s) of computers you want to configure.

See

Check which policies a group uses

(page 33).

191

Sophos Enterprise Console

2. In the Policies pane, double-click Device control. Then double-click the policy you want to change.

3. In the Device control policy dialog box, on the Messaging tab, desktop messaging is enabled by default. To further configure messaging, do the following:

■

To enter a message text for desktop messaging, in the Message text box, type a message that will be added to the end of the standard message.

You can enter a maximum of 100 characters. You can also add an HTML link to the message, for example, <a href="http://www.sophos.com">About Sophos</a>.

Note: User-defined desktop messages are not displayed on computers running Windows

■

To enable email alerting, select the Enable email alerting check box. In the Email

recipients field, enter the email addresses of the recipients. Separate each address with a semicolon (;).

To enable SNMP messaging, select the Enable SNMP messaging check box.

The email server and SNMP trap settings are configured via the anti-virus and HIPS policy.

8.9 Set up network status email alerts

If you use role-based administration, you must have the System configuration right to configure

the network status email alerts. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page

20).

You can set up email alerts to be sent to your chosen recipients when a warning or critical level has been exceeded for a dashboard section.

1. On the Tools menu, select Configure email alerts.

The Configure email alerts dialog box is displayed.

2. If SMTP settings have not been configured, or if you want to view or change the settings, click

Configure. In the Configure SMTP settings dialog box, enter the details as described below.

a) In the Server address text box, type the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.

b) In the Sender text box, type an email address to which bounces and non-delivery reports can be sent.

c) Click Test to test the connection.

3. In the Recipients panel, click Add.

The Add a new email alert recipient dialog box appears.

4. In the Email address field, enter the address of your recipient.

5. In the Language field, select the language in which email alerts should be sent.

6. In the Subscriptions pane, select “warning level exceeded” and “critical level exceeded” email alerts you want to send to this recipient.

192

Help

8.10 Set up Active Directory synchronization email alerts

If you use role-based administration, you must have the System configuration right to configure

the Active Directory synchronization email alerts. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

You can set up email alerts to be sent to your chosen recipients about new computers and groups discovered during synchronizations with Active Directory. If you choose to protect computers in synchronized groups automatically, you can also set up alerts about automatic protection failures.

1. On the Tools menu, select Configure email alerts.

The Configure email alerts dialog box is displayed.

2. If SMTP settings have not been configured, or if you want to view or change the settings, click

Configure.

In the Configure SMTP settings dialog box, enter the details as described below.

a) In the Server address text box, type the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.

b) In the Sender text box, type an email address to which bounces and non-delivery reports can be sent.

c) Click Test to test the connection.

3. In the Recipients panel, click Add.

The Add a new email alert recipient dialog box appears.

4. In the Email address field, enter the address of your recipient.

5. In the Language field, select the language in which email alerts should be sent.

6. In the Subscriptions pane, select “Active Directory synchronization” email alerts you want to send to this recipient.

“Active Directory synchronization” email alerts:

■

New groups discovered

■

New computers discovered

Automatic computer protection has failed

8.11 Configure Windows event logging

If you use role-based administration:

■

You must have the Policy setting - anti-virus and HIPS right to perform this task.

■

You cannot edit a policy if it is applied outside your active sub-estate.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

By default, Sophos Endpoint Security and Control adds alerts to the Windows event log when a virus or spyware is detected or cleaned up, suspicious behavior or file is detected, or adware or

PUA is detected or cleaned up.

193

Sophos Enterprise Console

To edit these settings:

1. In the Policies pane, double-click the anti-virus and HIPS policy you want to change.

2. In the Anti-virus and HIPS policy dialog box, click Messaging.

3. In the Messaging dialog box, go to the Event log tab.

By default, event logging is enabled. Edit the settings, if appropriate.

Scanning errors include instances when Sophos Endpoint Security and Control is denied access to an item that it attempts to scan.

8.12 Turn sending feedback to Sophos on or off

If you use role-based administration, you must have the System configuration right to turn sending feedback to Sophos on or off. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

You can choose to allow Sophos Enterprise Console to send the information about the number of managed computers, types and versions of operating systems and Sophos products in use to

Sophos each week. Sophos will use this information to provide a better support service and to increase our understanding of how customers use our products.

For further details about the types of information collected and the way in which your information is processed, please refer to the Sophos End User License Agreement and the Sophos Privacy

Policy located at http://www.sophos.com/legal .

By default, sending feedback to Sophos is enabled. You are given the option of disabling it when installing or upgrading the console, in the Sophos Enterprise Console installation wizard.

If you want to turn sending feedback to Sophos on or off after installation, do the following:

1. On the Tools menu, click Feedback to Sophos.

2. In the Feedback to Sophos dialog box, you can enable or disable sending feedback to Sophos.

■

If you want to enable sending feedback to Sophos, read the agreement and select the I

agree check box if you agree to the terms.

If you want to disable sending feedback to Sophos, clear the I agree check box.

If you want to enable Sophos customer support to contact you directly, for example, if there is a platform or version issue, enter your Sophos username and/or contact email address.

If you are happy to enable sending feedback to Sophos, but would like to remain anonymous, you need not provide the username or email address.

194

Help

9 Viewing events

9.1 About events

When an application control, data control, device control, firewall, patch assessment, tamper protection, web control or encryption event occurs on an endpoint computer, for example, an application has been blocked by the firewall, that event is sent to Enterprise Console and can be viewed in the respective event viewer.

Using the event viewers, you can investigate events that have occurred on the network. You can also generate a list of events based on a filter you configure, for example, a list of all data control events for the past seven days generated by a certain user.

The number of computers with events over a specified threshold within the last seven days is displayed on the Dashboard (except for tamper protection events). For information on how to set up the threshold, see

Configure the Dashboard

(page 56).

You can also set up alerts to be sent to your chosen recipients when an event has occurred. For more information, see

About alerts and messages

(page 186).

9.2 View application control events

To view application control events:

1. On the Events menu, click Application Control Events.

The Application Control - Event Viewer dialog box appears.

2. In the Search period field, click the drop-down arrow and select the period for which you want to display the events.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Within 24 hours, or select Custom and specify your own time period by selecting the starting and ending dates and times.

3. If you want to view events for a certain user or computer, enter the name in the respective field.

If you leave the fields empty, events for all users and computers will be displayed.

You can use wildcards in these fields. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters.

4. If you want to view events for a certain application type, in the Application type field, click the drop-down arrow and select the application type.

By default, the event viewer displays events for all application types.

5. Click Search to display a list of events.

You can export the list of application control events to a file. For details, see Export the list of events to a file

(page 204).

195

Sophos Enterprise Console

196

9.3 View data control events

Note: This feature will be unavailable if your license doesn't include Data Control.

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Data control events right to view data control events in Enterprise Console. For more information about role-based administration, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

To view data control events:

1. On the Events menu, click Data Control Events.

The Data Control - Event Viewer dialog box appears.

2. In the Search period field, click the drop-down arrow and select the period for which you want to display the events.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Within 24 hours, or select Custom and specify your own time period by selecting the starting and ending dates and times.

3. If you want to view events for a certain user, computer, or file, enter the name in the respective field.

If you leave the fields empty, events for all users, computers, and files will be displayed.

You can use wildcards in these fields. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters.

4. If you want to view events for a certain rule, in the Rule name field, click the drop-down arrow and select the rule name.

By default, the event viewer displays events for all rules.

5. If you want to view events for a certain file type, in the File type field, click the drop-down arrow and select the file type.

By default, the event viewer displays events for all file types.

6. Click Search to display a list of events.

You can export the list of data control events to a file. For details, see

Export the list of events to a file

(page 204).

9.4 View device control events

To view device control events:

1. On the Events menu, click Device Control Events.

The Device Control - Event Viewer dialog box appears.

2. In the Search period field, click the drop-down arrow and select the period for which you want to display the events.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Within 24 hours, or select Custom and specify your own time period by selecting the starting and ending dates and times.

3. If you want to view events for a certain device type, in the Device type field, click the drop-down arrow and select the device type.

By default, the event viewer displays events for all device types.

Help

4. If you want to view events for a certain user or computer, enter the name in the respective field.

If you leave the fields empty, events for all users and computers will be displayed.

You can use wildcards in these fields. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters.

5. Click Search to display a list of events.

In the Device Control - Event Viewer dialog box, you can exempt a device from the device

control policies. For details, see Exempt a device from all policies (page 163).

You can export the list of device control events to a file. For details, see Export the list of events to a file (page 204).

9.5 View firewall events

Firewall events are sent only once from an endpoint computer to the console. Identical events from different endpoints are grouped together in the Firewall - Event Viewer. In the Count column, you can see the total number of times that an event has been sent from different endpoints.

To view firewall events:

1. On the Events menu, click Firewall Events.

The Firewall - Event Viewer dialog box appears.

2. In the Search period field, click the drop-down arrow and select the period for which you want to display the events.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Within 24 hours, or select Custom and specify your own time period by selecting the starting and ending dates and times.

3. If you want to view events of a certain type, in the Event type field, click the drop-down arrow and select the event type.

By default, the event viewer displays all types of events.

4. If you want to view events for a certain file, in the File name field, enter the file name.

If you leave this field empty, events for all files will be displayed.

You can use wildcards in this field. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters.

5. Click Search to display a list of events.

In the Firewall - Event Viewer dialog box, you can create a firewall rule as described in Create a firewall event rule (page 119).

You can export the list of firewall events to a file. For details, see Export the list of events to a file

(page 204).

9.6 View encryption events

Note: This feature will be unavailable if your license doesn't include Full Disk Encryption.

197

Sophos Enterprise Console

To view events logged for computers protected by full disk encryption:

1. On the Events menu, click Encryption Events.

The Encryption Events - Event Viewer dialog box appears.

2. In the Search period field, click the drop-down arrow and select the period for which you want to display the events.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Within 24 hours, or select Custom and specify your own time period by selecting the starting and ending dates and times.

3. If you want to view events for a certain user or computer, enter the name in the respective field.

If you leave the fields empty, events for all users and computers will be displayed.

You can use wildcards in these fields. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters.

4. If you want to view events of a certain level, in the Level field, click the drop-down arrow and select the event level: All, Error, or Warning.

By default, the event viewer displays events of all levels.

5. Click Search to display a list of events.

You can export the list of events to a file. For details, see Export the list of events to a file

(page

204).

Note: On the endpoint computer, all events are logged. You can view them in the Windows event log.

9.7 View tamper protection events

There are two types of tamper protection event:

■

Successful tamper protection authentication events, showing the name of the authenticated user and the time of authentication.

■

Failed attempts to tamper, showing the name of the targeted Sophos product or component, the time of the attempt, and the details of the user responsible for the attempt.

To view tamper protection events:

1. On the Events menu, click Tamper Protection Events.

The Tamper Protection - Event Viewer dialog box appears.

2. In the Search period field, click the drop-down arrow and select the period for which you want to display the events.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Within 24 hours, or select Custom and specify your own time period by selecting the starting and ending dates and times.

3. If you want to view events of a certain type, in the Event type field, click the drop-down arrow and select the type of event.

By default, the event viewer displays events of all types.

198

Help

4. If you want to view events for a certain user or computer, enter the name in the respective field.

If you leave the fields empty, events for all users and computers will be displayed.

You can use wildcards in these fields. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters.

5. Click Search to display a list of events.

You can export the list of events to a file. For details, see Export the list of events to a file

(page

204).

9.8 Viewing patch assessment events

9.8.1 About patch assessment event views

Note: This feature will be unavailable if your license doesn't include Patch Assessment.

The Patch Assessment - Event Viewer contains information about security patches and results of patch assessments.

The Patch updates field displays the download status of patch information. It displays one of the following status messages:

■

Not downloaded indicates patch information is not downloaded or you do not have the license to use the Patch feature.

■

Downloading indicates the first download, after install, is in progress.

OK indicates patch information is up-to-date.

■

Out of date indicates that there has not been a fully successful update of patch data in the past 72 hours. Typically this status is displayed if SEC is not up-to-date, due to issues with network connectivity. It may also be displayed if you change your license from a SEC that has the Patch feature, to another without it. It is possible that a partial update may have occurred when this status message is displayed.

The Patch Assessment - Event Viewer has the following tabs:

Patches by rating

This tab by default displays missing patches. Each patch is displayed, along with a count of the computers missing the patch, and the threats and vulnerabilities linked to the patch. You can use filters to show a full list of all the supported patches with a count of the number of computers missing them.

Computers missing patches

This tab displays patch assessment status by computer. Each computer is displayed, along with its missing patches. Computers are listed multiple times if missing more than one patch.

199

Sophos Enterprise Console

9.8.2 View patch assessment events

To view patch assessment events:

1. On the Events menu, click Patch Assessment Events.

The Patch Assessment - Event Viewer dialog box appears.

2. Click on one of the tabs Patches by rating or Computers missing patches. For more information about tabs, see

About patch assessment event views

(page 199).

3. In the search panel, if you want to view events for a certain patch by its name, computer, threat, or vulnerability, enter the information in the respective field. Available criteria are based on the information displayed in the tab.

If you leave the fields empty, events for all patch names, patch IDs, and computer names will be displayed.

You can use wildcards in these fields. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters.

4. If you want to view events for a certain patch by its status, rating, vendor, group, or release date, click the drop-down arrow of the respective field and select the appropriate option.

Available criteria are based on the information displayed in the tab.

By default, the event viewer displays events for the threat ratings, vendors, groups, threats, and patch names for the missing patches.

5. Click Search to display a list of patch assessment events.

For information on results that are displayed, see

Search result categories (page 201).

You can right-click on an individual hyperlink to copy its name, or use Ctrl+C to copy a patch assessment event row to the Clipboard.

You can export the list of patch assessment events. For details, see

Export the list of events to a file

(page 204).

You can view details about a specific patch by clicking the provided link. For more information, see

View patch, threat, or vulnerability details

(page 200).

9.8.3 View patch, threat, or vulnerability details

To view patch, threat, or vulnerability details:

1. On the Events menu, click Patch Assessment Events.

The Patch Assessment - Event Viewer dialog box appears.

2. Click on one of the tabs Patches by rating or Computers missing patches, select the required options, and click Search to display a list of events.

For information on results that are displayed, see

Search result categories (page 201).

3. Click the patch name for which you want to view additional details.

4. In the Patch Detail dialog box, you can view a description of the patch and information about the threats and vulnerabilities it protects against. If available, you can:

■

Click the patch name to open a web browser and view vendor information about a patch.

200

Help

■

Click the threat to open a web browser and view the Sophos threat analysis and recommendations.

Click the vulnerability to open a web browser and view common vulnerabilities and exposures

(CVE) information.

Click the patch name in the Previously addressed by column to open a web browser and view vendor information about a patch that has been superseded.

The list is sorted alphabetically by threat and then by vulnerability.

9.8.4 Patch assessment search results

9.8.4.1 Search result categories

The search results are displayed in different categories based on the tab:

■

Patches by rating (page 201)

Computers missing patches (page 202)

9.8.4.2 Patches by rating

The search results are displayed based on the following categories:

■

Threats: A threat can be a virus, Trojan, worm, spyware, malicious website as well as adware and other potentially unwanted applications. You can click on the threat name to view the

Sophos threat analysis and recommendations in a web browser.

Vulnerabilities: A vulnerability is a software weakness which can be exploited by an attacker.

The potential damage that could be caused by the exploitation is dependant upon the nature of the vulnerability, and the affected software. Patches are provided to fix vulnerabilities so that exploitation is no longer possible. You can click on the vulnerability name to view common vulnerabilities and exposures (CVE) information in a web browser.

Rating: Patches are rated by SophosLabs.

Note: We recommend all the missing patches are applied irrespective of their rating.

■

Critical: It is almost certain that one or more vulnerabilities addressed by this patch will be exploited.

High: It is highly likely that one or more vulnerabilities addressed by this patch will be exploited.

■

Medium: It is possible that one or more vulnerabilities addressed by this patch will be exploited.

Low: It is unlikely that any vulnerabilities addressed by this patch will be exploited.

■

Patch name: Displays the name of the patch. You can click on the patch name to open a web browser and view vendor information about a patch.

Vendor: Displays the name of the vendor that published the patch.

Computers: Displays the number of computers that are affected. If one or more computers are affected, you can click on the number to view the details in the Computers missing

patches tab. If a "-" is displayed, it indicates that the patch is not assessed.

201

Sophos Enterprise Console

■

Superseded by: Displays the name(s) of any superseding patches.You can click on the patch name to open the Patch detail dialog box to view information about the superseding patch.

Release date: Displays the patch release date.

9.8.4.3 Computers missing patches

The search results are displayed based on the following categories:

■

Computer: Displays the name of the computer that is affected.

Rating: Patches are rated by SophosLabs.

Note: We recommend all the missing patches are applied irrespective of their rating.

■

Critical: It is almost certain that one or more vulnerabilities addressed by this patch will be exploited.

■

High: It is highly likely that one or more vulnerabilities addressed by this patch will be exploited.

Medium: It is possible that one or more vulnerabilities addressed by this patch will be exploited.

Low: It is unlikely that any vulnerabilities addressed by this patch will be exploited.

■

Patch name: Displays the name of the patch. You can click on the patch name to open a web browser and view vendor information about a patch.

Superseded by: Displays the name(s) of any superseding patches.You can click on the patch name to open the Patch detail dialog box to view information about the superseding patch.

Last assessment: Displays the date when a computer was last assessed for missing patches.

Vendor: Displays the name of the vendor that published the patch.

Release date: Displays the patch release date.

Group: Displays the group name to which the computer belongs.

9.9 Viewing web events

9.9.1 View web events

Note: This feature will be unavailable if your license doesn't include Web Control.

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Web events right to view web events in

Enterprise Console. For more information about role-based administration, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

You can view the following web events in the Web Event Viewer:

■

Malicious websites blocked by the Web Protection feature in the Anti-virus and HIPS policy.

■

Web control events, if you use the web control feature.

Web control events are displayed differently, depending on which web control policy is selected.

Although the Web Event Viewer can be used in both policy modes, the content is different.

202

Help

When the Inappropriate Website Control policy option is selected, you can view any “Block” and “Warn” actions. Visited HTTPS sites categorized as “Warn” are logged as “Proceed” events because Sophos Endpoint Security and Control responds differently to HTTPS (see the note in

About Inappropriate Website Control

(page 178)).

When Full Web Control is selected, events are displayed on the appliance.

■

For Sophos Web Appliance or Management Appliance, you can view browsing activity using the Reports and Search features. “Block,” “Warn,” and “Allow” actions are all shown. Visited

HTTPS sites categorized as “Warn” are displayed as “Proceed” events because Sophos

Endpoint Security and Control responds differently to HTTPS (see the note in About Full Web

Control

(page 182)).

For UTM, use the Logging & Reporting > Web Protection > Web Usage Report page.

There you can see actions showing whether the website has been delivered to the client

(passed), whether it has been blocked by an application control rule, or whether a user gained access to a blocked page using the bypass blocking feature (overridden), as well as other information.

Note: Regardless of which policy you select, websites scanned and assessed by Sophos Endpoint

Security and Control's live URL-filtering (

Web Protection (page 106)) are displayed as web events

in Enterprise Console.

To view web events:

1. On the Events menu, click Web Events.

The Web - Event Viewer dialog box appears.

2. In the Search period box, click the drop-down arrow, and select the period for which you want to display the events.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Within 24 hours, or select Custom and specify your own time period by selecting the starting and ending dates and times.

3. If you want to view events for a certain User or Computer, enter the name in the respective field.

If you leave the fields empty, events for all users and computers will be displayed.

You can use wildcards in these fields. Use ? for any single character and * for any string of characters.

4. If you want to view events associated with a certain action, in the Action field, click the drop-down arrow and select the action.

5. If you want to view events associated with a specific domain, enter it in the Domain field.

6. If you want to view events that were triggered for a particular Reason, click the drop-down arrow and select the reason.

7. Click Search to display a list of events.

You can export the list of web events to a file. For details, see

Export the list of events to a file

(page 204).

9.9.2 View latest web events on a computer

You can view the last 10 events for which an action was taken on an endpoint computer, for example, recently blocked websites.

203

Sophos Enterprise Console

To view the latest web events:

1. In the Endpoints view, in the computer list, double-click the computer for which you want to view activity.

2. In the Computer details dialog box, scroll down to the Latest web events section.

You can also view the number of events for a user by generating a report. For more information, see

Configure the Events by user report (page 211).

9.10 Export the list of events to a file

You can export the list of application control, data control, device control, firewall, patch assessment, encryption, tamper protection, or web events to a comma separated value (CSV) file. You can also export the list of patch assessment events to a PDF file.

1. On the Events menu, click one of the “events” options, depending on which event list you want to export.

The Event Viewer dialog box appears.

2. If you want to display only certain events, in the Search criteria pane, set the filters as appropriate and click Search to display the events.

For more information, see

View application control events (page 195),

View data control events

(page 196),

View device control events

(page 196), View encryption events (page 197), View firewall events

(page 197), View patch assessment events (page 200),

View tamper protection events

(page 198), or

View web events

(page 202).

3. Click Export.

4. In the Save As window, browse to select a destination for the file, enter a file name in the File

name dialog box, and select a file type in the Save as type dialog box.

5. Click Save.

204

Help

10 Generating reports

10.1 About reports

Reports provide textual and graphical information on a variety of aspects of your network's security status.

Reports are available via the Report Manager. Using the Report Manager, you can quickly create a report based on an existing template, change configuration of an existing report, and schedule a report to run at regular intervals, with the results being sent to your chosen recipients as an email attachment. You can also print reports and export them in a number of formats.

Sophos provides a number of reports that you can use out of the box or configure to tailor your needs. These reports are:

■

Alert and event history

Alert summary

Alerts and events by item name

Alerts and events by time

■

Alerts and events per location

Endpoint policy non-compliance

Events by user

Managed endpoint protection

Updating hierarchy

Reports and role-based administration

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Report configuration right to create, edit, or delete a report. If you do not have this right, you can only run a report. For more information

about role-based administration, see About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

A report can only include data from the active sub-estate. You cannot share reports between sub-estates. The default reports are not copied from the Default sub-estate to new sub-estates you create.

When you delete a sub-estate, all reports in that sub-estate are also deleted.

10.2 Create a new report

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Report configuration right to perform

this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

205

Sophos Enterprise Console

To create a report:

1. Click the Reports icon on the toolbar.

2. In the Report Manager dialog box, click Create.

3. In the Create new report dialog box, select a report template and click OK.

A wizard guides you through creating a report based on your chosen template.

If you do not want to use the wizard, in the Create new report dialog box, clear the Use the

wizard to create report check box. You can then configure your new report in the report properties dialog box. For more information, see the topic on configuring the relevant report.

10.3 Configure the Alert and event history report

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Report configuration right to perform

this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

The Alert and event history report shows alerts and events per specified reporting period.

1. Click the Reports icon on the toolbar.

2. In the Report Manager dialog box, select Alert and event history and click Properties.

3. In the Alert and Event History Properties dialog box, on the Configuration tab, set up the options you want.

a) In the Report details panel, edit the name and description of the report, if you wish.

b) In the Reporting period panel, in the Period text box, click the drop-down arrow and select a time period.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Last month, or select Custom and specify your own time period in the Start and End boxes.

c) In the Report location panel, click Group of computers or Individual computer. Then click the drop-down arrow to specify a group or computer name.

d) In the Alert and event types to include panel, select alert and event types you want to include in the report.

By default, the report shows all alert and event types.

Alternatively, you can configure the report to show only locations that have reported a particular alert or event. To specify a single alert or event, click Advanced and click an alert or event name in the list. To specify more than one alert or event, type a name in the text box, using wildcards. Use ? for any single character in the name, and * for any string of characters. For example, W32/* would specify all viruses with names beginning W32/.

4. On the Display options tab, select how you want to sort the alerts and events.

By default, alert and event details are sorted according to Alert and event name. However, reports can also be sorted by Computer name, computer Group name, or Date and time.

5. On the Schedule tab, select Schedule this report if you want to run the report at regular intervals, with the results being sent to your chosen recipients as email attachments. Enter the start date and time and the frequency with which the report will be generated, specify the output file format and language, and enter the email addresses of the recipients of the report.

206

Help

10.4 Configure the Alert summary report

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Report configuration right to perform

this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

The Alert summary report provides statistics on the overall health and status of your network.

1. Click the Reports icon on the toolbar.

2. In the Report Manager dialog box, select Alert summary and click Properties.

3. In the Alert Summary Properties dialog box, on the Configuration tab, set up the options you want.

a) In the Report details panel, edit the name and description of the report, if you wish.

b) In the Reporting period panel, in the Period text box, click the drop-down arrow and select a time period.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Last month, or select Custom and specify your own time period in the Start and End boxes.

4. In the Display options tab, under Display results per, specify the intervals of time at which the non-compliance is measured, for example, each hour or each day, click the drop-down arrow and select an interval.

10.5 Configure the Alerts and events by item name report

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Report configuration right to perform

this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

The Alerts and events by item name report provides statistics on all alerts and events from all computers over a selected period, grouped by item name.

To configure the report:

1. Click the Reports icon on the toolbar.

2. In the Report Manager dialog box, select Alerts and events by item name and click

Properties.

3. In the Alerts and Events by Item Name Properties dialog box, on the Configuration tab, set up the options you want.

a) In the Report details panel, edit the name and description of the report, if you wish.

b) In the Reporting period panel, in the Period text box, click the drop-down arrow and select a time period.

207

Sophos Enterprise Console

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Last month, or select Custom and specify your own time period in the Start and End boxes.

c) In the Report location panel, click Group of computers or Individual computer. Then click the drop-down arrow to specify a group or computer name.

d) In the Alert and event types to include panel, select alert and event types you want to include in the report.

By default, the report shows all alert and event types.

4. On the Display options tab, under Display, choose which alerts and events you want the report to show.

By default, the report shows all alerts and events and the number of occurrences for each.

You can also configure the report to show only:

■

■ the top n alerts and events (where n is a number you specify), or alerts and events with m occurrences or more (where m is a number you specify).

5. Under Sort by, select whether you want to sort alerts and events by the number or name.

By default, the report lists alerts and events in order of decreasing number of occurrences.

6. On the Schedule tab, select Schedule this report if you want to run the report at regular intervals, with the results being sent to your chosen recipients as email attachments. Enter the start date and time and the frequency with which the report will be generated, specify the output file format and language, and enter the email addresses of the recipients of the report.

10.6 Configure the Alerts and events by time report

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Report configuration right to perform

this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

The Alerts and events by time report shows alerts and events summarized at specified intervals.

1. Click the Reports icon on the toolbar.

2. In the Report Manager dialog box, select Alerts and events by time and click Properties.

3. In the Alerts and Events by Time Properties dialog box, on the Configuration tab, set up the options you want.

a) In the Report details panel, edit the name and description of the report, if you wish.

b) In the Reporting period panel, in the Period text box, click the drop-down arrow and select a time period.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Last month, or select Custom and specify your own time period in the Start and End boxes.

c) In the Report location panel, click Group of computers or Individual computer. Then click the drop-down arrow to specify a group or computer name.

d) In the Alert and event types to include panel, select alert and event types you want to include in the report.

By default, the report shows all alert and event types.

208

Help

4. On the Display options tab, specify the intervals of time at which the rate of alerts and events is measured, for example, each hour or each day, click the drop-down arrow and select an interval.

10.7 Configure the Alerts and events per location report

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Report configuration right to perform

this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

The Alerts and events per location report provides statistics on all alerts from all computers over a selected period, grouped by location.

1. Click the Reports icon on the toolbar.

2. In the Report Manager dialog box, select Alerts and events per location and click Properties.

3. In the Alerts and Events per Location Properties dialog box, on the Configuration tab, set up the options you want.

a) In the Report details panel, edit the name and description of the report, if you wish.

b) In the Reporting period panel, in the Period text box, click the drop-down arrow and select a time period.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Last month, or select Custom and specify your own time period in the Start and End boxes.

c) In the Report location panel, click Computers to show alerts per computer or Group to show alerts for each group of computers.

d) In the Alert and event types to include panel, select alert and event types you want to include in the report.

By default, the report shows all alert and event types.

209

Sophos Enterprise Console

4. On the Display options tab, under Display, choose which locations you want the report to show.

By default, the report shows all computers and groups and the number of occurrences for each. You can configure it to show only:

■

■ the top n locations that have recorded the most alerts and events (where n is a number you specify), or locations with m alerts and events or more (where m is a number you specify).

5. Under Sort by, select whether you want to sort locations by the number of items detected or name.

By default, the report lists locations in order of decreasing number of alerts and events per location. Select Location if you want them sorted by name in alphabetical order.

10.8 Configure the Endpoint policy non-compliance report

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Report configuration right to perform

this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

The Endpoint policy non-compliance report shows the percentage or number of computers that do not comply with their group policy, summarized at specified intervals.

1. Click the Reports icon on the toolbar.

2. In the Report Manager dialog box, select Endpoint policy non-compliance and click

Properties.

3. In the Endpoint Policy Non-Compliance Properties dialog box, on the Configuration tab, set up the options you want.

a) In the Report details panel, edit the name and description of the report, if you wish.

b) In the Reporting period panel, in the Period text box, click the drop-down arrow and select a time period.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Last month, or select Custom and specify your own time period in the Start and End boxes.

c) In the Show panel, select the policies you want to show in the report. By default, only

Anti-virus and HIPS policy is selected.

5. Under Display results as, select whether you want to display results as percentages or numbers.

210

Help

10.9 Configure the Events by user report

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Report configuration right to perform

this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

The Events by user report shows application control, firewall, data control, and device control events, along with web events, grouped by user.

1. Click the Reports icon on the toolbar.

2. In the Report Manager dialog box, select Events by user and click Properties.

3. In the Events by User Properties dialog box, on the Configuration tab, set up the options you want.

a) In the Report details panel, edit the name and description of the report, if you wish.

b) In the Reporting period panel, in the Period text box, click the drop-down arrow and select a time period.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Last month, or select Custom and specify your own time period in the Start and End boxes.

c) Under Event types to include, select the features for which you want to show events.

4. On the Display options tab, under Display, choose which users you want the report to show.

By default, the report shows all users and the number of events for each. You can configure it to show only:

■

■ the top n users that have recorded the most events (where n is a number you specify), or users with m events or more (where m is a number you specify).

5. Under Sort by, select whether you want to sort users by the number of events or name.

By default, the report lists users in order of decreasing number of events per user. Select User if you want them sorted by name in alphabetical order.

10.10 Configure the Managed endpoint protection report

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Report configuration right to perform

this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

The Managed endpoint protection report shows the percentage or number of protected computers, summarized at specified intervals.

1. Click the Reports icon on the toolbar.

2. In the Report Manager dialog box, select Managed endpoint protection and click Properties.

211

Sophos Enterprise Console

3. In the Managed Endpoint Protection Properties dialog box, on the Configuration tab, set up the options you want.

a) In the Report identity panel, edit the name and description of the report, if you wish.

b) In the Reporting period panel, in the Period text box, click the drop-down arrow and select a time period.

You can either select a fixed period, for example, Last month, or select Custom and specify your own time period in the Start and End boxes.

c) In the Show panel, select the features you want to show in the report.

5. Under Display results as, select whether you want to display results as percentages or numbers.

10.11 Updating hierarchy report

The Updating hierarchy report shows update managers on your network, update shares that they maintain, and the number of computers that update from these shares.

You cannot configure the Updating hierarchy report. You can run the report as described in

Run a report (page 212).

10.12 Schedule a report

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Report configuration right to perform

this task. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

You can schedule a report to run at regular intervals, with the results being sent to your chosen recipients as email attachments.

1. Click the Reports icon on the toolbar.

2. In the Report Manager dialog box, select the report you want to schedule and click Schedule.

3. In the dialog box that appears, on the Schedule tab, select Schedule this report.

4. Enter the start date and time and the frequency with which the report will be generated.

5. Specify the output file format and language.

6. Enter the email addresses of the recipients of the report.

10.13 Run a report

1. Click the Reports icon on the toolbar.

212

Help

2. In the Report Manager dialog box, select the report you want to run and click Run.

The Reporting window, showing the report, is displayed.

You can change the report layout, print the report or export it to a file.

10.14 View a report as a table or chart

Some report can be viewed both as a table and as a chart. If this is the case, you will see two tabs, Table and Chart in the Reporting window displaying the report.

1. Click the Reports icon on the toolbar.

2. In the Report Manager dialog box, select the report you want to run, for example, Alerts and

events per location, and click Run.

The Reporting window, showing the report, is displayed.

3. To view the report as a table or chart, go to the respective tab.

10.15 Print a report

To print a report, click the Print icon on the toolbar at the top of the report.

10.16 Export a report to a file

To export a report to a file:

1. Click the Export icon in the toolbar at the top of the report.

2. In the Export report dialog box, select the type of document or spreadsheet you would like to export the report to.

The options are:

■

PDF (Acrobat)

HTML

■

Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Word

Rich Text Format (RTF)

Comma separated values (CSV)

XML

3. Click the File Name browse button to select a location. Then enter a name. Click OK.

213

Sophos Enterprise Console

10.17 Change the report layout

You can change the page layout used for reports. For example, you can display a report in landscape (wide-page) format.

1. Click the page layout icon in the toolbar at the top of the report.

2. In the Page Setup dialog box, specify page size, orientation and margins. Click OK.

The report is then displayed with these page settings.

These page settings are also used when you print or export the report.

214

Help

11 Auditing

11.1 About auditing

Auditing enables you to monitor changes in Enterprise Console configuration and other user or system actions. You can use this information for regulatory compliance and troubleshooting or, in the case of malicious activity, during a forensic analysis.

By default, auditing is disabled. After you enable auditing, an audit entry is written to the auditing database whenever certain configuration settings are changed or certain actions are performed.

Note: If you use role-based administration, you must have the Auditing right to enable or disable auditing. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

The audit entry includes the following information:

■

Action performed

■

User who performed the action

User's computer

■

User's sub-estate

Date and time of the action

Both successful and failed attempts at actions are audited, so the audit entries can show who performed actions on the system and who started actions that did not complete successfully.

Audited actions include:

11.2 Enable or disable auditing

If you use role-based administration, you must have the Auditing right to enable or disable auditing. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

To enable or disable auditing:

1. On the Tools menu, click Manage Auditing.

2. In the Manage Auditing dialog box, select or clear the Enable auditing check box to enable or disable auditing. The option is disabled by default.

216

Help

12 Recovering access to encrypted computers

12.1 Recover access with Challenge/Response

Note: This feature will be unavailable if your license doesn't include Full Disk Encryption.

Challenge/Response helps users who cannot log on to their computers or access encrypted data.

During the Challenge/Response procedure, the user provides a challenge code generated on the endpoint computer to the help desk officer. The help desk officer then generates a response code that authorizes the user to perform a specific action on the computer.

For users to be able to recover access with Challenge/Response, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled:

■

Challenge/Response needs to be enabled for endpoint computers in a full disk encryption policy.

■

If you use role-based administration, you must have the right Remediation - encryption

recovery. For more information, see About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

If the user has forgotten their password, you must reset it in the Active Directory before generating the response code.

■

If the user cannot log on because the Power-on Authentication is corrupt, make sure that the key recovery file is exported and available in the user environment to initiate the

Challenge/Response procedure, see Export key recovery file (page 218).

1. On the endpoint computer the user initiates a Challenge/Response procedure, generates a challenge code and contacts you.

For further information about initiating a Challenge/Response procedure in case of a forgotten password, see the Sophos Disk Encryption user help. For further information about initiating a Challenge/Response procedure in case the Power-on Authentication is corrupt, see the

Sophos Disk Encryption tools guide.

2. In the Computers list, right-click the respective computer and select Encryption Recovery.

The Encryption Recovery wizard is launched.

3. On the Select the recovery method page, select the required recovery method and click

Next.

■

If the user has forgotten their password, select Forgotten password (logon recovery).

If the user cannot log on because the Power-on Authentication is corrupt, select Power-on

Authentication corrupt (key recovery).

4. On the Enter the challenge page, enter the challenge code the user has provided and click

Next.

The response code is generated and displayed on the Tell end user the response page.

217

Sophos Enterprise Console

5. Tell the end user the response code.

If you tell the user the response code over the phone, you can use the Phonetic Alphabet for easy spelling.

6. The user enters the response code on the endpoint computer.

Access to the endpoint computer is recovered.

12.1.1 Export key recovery file

If you use role-based administration, you must have the right Global encryption settings.

For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates (page 20).

The key recovery file is used to initiate the Challenge/Response procedure on the endpoint computer when the Power-on Authentication is corrupt and the user cannot log on to the computer.

The key recovery file must be exported. To initiate a Challenge/Response procedure when the

Power-on authentication is corrupt, see the Sophos Disk Encryption tools guide.

To export the key recovery file:

1. On the Tools menu, click Manage encryption and select Export key recovery file.

2. Select a location for the key recovery file *.TOK.

3. Make the key recovery file available to the help desk.

12.2 Recover access with Local Self Help

Note: This feature will be unavailable if your license doesn't include Full Disk Encryption.

With Local Self Help users who have forgotten their password can log on at their computer without the assistance of a help desk. Users log on by answering predefined questions in the Power-on

Authentication on the endpoint computer.

For users to be able to recover access with Local Self Help, Local Self Help has to be enabled in a full disk encrypion policy.

To recover access with Local Self Help:

1. On the endpoint computer, in the Power-on Authentication, the user enters their user name and clicks the Recovery button.

2. In the following five dialogs, the user answers a defined number of questions randomly selected from the questions stored on the endpoint computer. After answering the last one, the user confirms the answers with OK.

3. In the next dialog, the user can view the password by pressing ENTER or SPACEBAR, or by clicking the blue display box.

The password is displayed for 5 seconds at the maximum. Afterwards, the startup process continues automatically. The user can hide the password immediately by pressing ENTER, or SPACEBAR, or by clicking the blue display box again.

4. After reading the password, the user clicks OK.

The user is logged on at the Power-on Authentication and to Windows and can use the password for future logon.

218

Help

13 Copying or printing data from Enterprise

Console

13.1 Copy data from the computer list

You can copy information displayed in the computer list, in the Endpoints view, to the Clipboard and then paste it into another document in a tab-separated format.

1. In the Endpoints view, in the Groups pane, select the group of computers for which you want to copy data.

2. In the View drop-down list, select which computers you want to display, for example,

Computers with potential problems.

3. If the group contains subgroups, select also whether you want to display computers At this

level only or At this level and below.

4. In the computer list, go to the tab you want to display, for example, Anti-Virus Details.

5. Click anywhere in the computer list to bring the focus to it.

6. On the Edit menu, click Copy to copy the data to the Clipboard.

13.2 Print data from the computer list

You can print information displayed in the computer list, in the Endpoints view.

1. In the Endpoints view, in the Groups pane, select the group of computers for which you want to print data.

2. In the View drop-down list, select which computers you want to display, for example,

Computers with potential problems.

3. If the group contains subgroups, select also whether you want to display computers At this

level only or At this level and below.

4. In the computer list, go to the tab you want to display, for example, Anti-Virus Details.

5. Click anywhere in the computer list to bring the focus to it.

6. On the File menu, click Print.

13.3 Copy computer details for a computer

You can copy information from the Computer details dialog box to the Clipboard and then paste it into another document. The information includes computer name, computer’s operating system, versions of the security software installed on the computer, any outstanding alerts and errors, update status, and so on.

1. In the Endpoints view, in the computer list, double-click the computer for which you want to copy the data.

219

Sophos Enterprise Console

2. In the Computer details dialog box, click Copy to copy the data to the Clipboard.

13.4 Print computer details for a computer

You can print information from the Computer details dialog box.The information includes computer name, computer’s operating system, versions of the security software installed on the computer, any outstanding alerts and errors, update status, and so on.

1. In the Endpoints view, in the computer list, double-click the computer for which you want to print the data.

2. In the Computer details dialog box, click Print.

220

Help

14 Troubleshooting

14.1 Computers are not running on-access scanning

If there are computers not running on-access scanning:

1. Check which anti-virus and HIPS policy is used by those computers.

For details, see

Check which policies a group uses (page 33).

2. Ensure that on-access scanning is enabled in that policy and that the computers comply with the policy.

For details, see

Turn on-access scanning on or off

(page 90) and

Make computers use the group policy (page 40).

14.2 The firewall is disabled

If there are computers with the firewall disabled:

1. Check which firewall policy is used by those computers.

For details, see

Check which policies a group uses (page 33).

2. Ensure that the firewall is enabled in that policy and that the computers comply with the policy.

For details, see

Temporarily disable the firewall (page 120) and

Make computers use the group policy

(page 40).

14.3 The firewall is not installed

Note: If you use role-based administration, you must have the Computer search, protection

and groups right to install the firewall. For more information, see

About roles and sub-estates

(page 20).

Before you attempt to install the client firewall on endpoint computers, check that the computers are running a Windows client operating system (Windows 2000 or later).

Note: You cannot install the firewall on computers running server operating systems or Windows

Vista Starter.

If there are computers on which you want to install the firewall:

1. Select the computers, right-click and select Protect Computers.

The Protect Computers Wizard appears. Click Next.

2. When prompted to select features, select Firewall. Complete the wizard.

If the problem persists, contact Sophos technical support.

221

Sophos Enterprise Console

14.4 Computers have outstanding alerts

■

If there are computers with a virus, or an application you do not want, see Clean up computers now

(page 62).

■

If there are computers with an adware or other potentially unwanted application that you do want, see

Authorize adware and PUAs

(page 110).

■

If there are out-of-date computers, see

Update out-of-date computers

(page 84) for help with diagnosing and fixing the problem.

Note: If you do not need the alert displayed any more, you can clear it. Select the computer(s) with alerts, right-click and select Resolve Alerts and Errors. You must have the Remediation

- cleanup right to acknowledge (clear) alerts and errors.

14.5 Computers are not managed by the console

Windows, Mac, Linux, and UNIX computers should be managed by Enterprise Console, so that they can be updated and monitored.

Note: Unless you use Active Directory synchronization (see About synchronization with Active

14.6 Cannot protect computers in the Unassigned group

The Unassigned group is only for holding computers that are not yet in groups created by you, to which policies can be applied. You cannot protect computers until you place them in such a group.

14.7 Sophos Endpoint Security and Control installation failed

If the Protect Computers Wizard fails to install Sophos Endpoint Security and Control on computers, it could be because:

■

Enterprise Console does not know which operating system the computers are running. This is probably because you did not enter your username in the format domain\user when finding computers.

Automatic installation is not possible on that operating system. Perform a manual installation.

For instructions, see the Sophos Enterprise Console advanced startup guide.

■

The computers are running a firewall.

“Simple File Sharing” has not been turned off on Windows XP computers.

The “Use Sharing Wizard” option has not been turned off on Windows Vista computers.

You selected to install a feature that is not supported on the computers’ operating systems.

For a full list of requirements for the Sophos Endpoint Security and Control features, see the system requirements page on the Sophos website

( http://www.sophos.com/en-us/products/all-system-requirements ).

14.8 Computers are not updated

See Update out-of-date computers (page 84) for help with diagnosing and fixing the problem.

14.9 Anti-virus settings do not take effect on Macs

Some anti-virus settings cannot be applied to Mac computers. In this case, there is a warning on that page of settings.

For more information about anti-virus and HIPS policy settings that apply to Macs, see http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/knowledgebase/118859.aspx

14.10 Anti-virus settings do not take effect on Linux or UNIX

Some anti-virus settings cannot be applied to Linux or UNIX computers. In this case, there is a warning on that page of settings.

You can change anti-virus settings on Linux computers using the

savconfig

and

savscan

commands as described in the Sophos Anti-Virus for Linux configuration guide. You can change

223

Sophos Enterprise Console anti-virus settings on UNIX computers using the

savscan

command as described in the Sophos

Anti-Virus for UNIX configuration guide.

14.11 Linux or UNIX computer does not comply with policy

If you use a corporate configuration file in the CID, and the file contains a configuration value which conflicts with the policy, the computer is shown as not complying with the policy.

Selecting the Comply with policy option brings the computer in compliance only temporarily, until the CID-based configuration is reapplied.

To resolve the problem, review the corporate configuration file and, where possible, replace by console-based configuration.

14.12 New scan appears unexpectedly on a Windows computer

If you look at the local copy of Sophos Endpoint Security and Control on Windows computers, you may see that a new "Available scan" is listed, even though the user has not created one.

This new scan is actually a scheduled scan that you have set up from the console. You should not delete it.

14.13 Connectivity and timeout problems

If the communications between Enterprise Console and a networked computer become slow or the computer becomes unresponsive, there may be a connectivity problem.

Check the Sophos Network Communications Report that presents an overview of the current state of communications between a computer and Enterprise Console. To view the report, go to the computer where the problem occurred. On the taskbar, click the Start button, select All

Programs| Sophos| Sophos Endpoint Security and Control, and then click View Sophos

Network Communications Report.

The report shows possible problem areas and, if a problem is detected, remedial actions.

14.14 Adware and PUAs are not detected

If adware and other potentially unwanted applications (PUAs) are not detected, you should check that:

■

Detection has been enabled. See

Configure on-access scanning

(page 88).

The applications are on a computer running Windows 2000 or later.

14.15 Partially detected item

Sophos Endpoint Security and Control may report that an item (for example, a Trojan or potentially unwanted application) is "partially detected". This means that it has not found all the component parts of that application.

224

Help

To find the other components, you need to carry out a full system scan of the computer(s) affected.

On computers running Windows 2000 or later, you can do this by selecting the computer(s), right-clicking and selecting Full system scan. You can also set up a scheduled scan for adware

and other potentially unwanted applications. See Configure on-access scanning (page 88) and

Create a scheduled scan

(page 95).

If the application has still not been fully detected, it may be because:

■ you have insufficient access rights

■ some drives or folders on the computer, containing the application's components, are excluded from scanning.

If the latter is the case, check the list of items excluded from scanning (see Exclude items from on-access scanning (page 93)). If there are some items on the list, remove them from the list and

scan your computer again.

Sophos Endpoint Security and Control may not be able to fully detect or remove adware and other potentially unwanted applications with components installed on network drives.

For advice, contact Sophos technical support.

14.16 Frequent alerts about potentially unwanted applications

You may receive very large numbers of alerts about potentially unwanted applications, including multiple reports of the same application.

This can occur because some types of potentially unwanted application "monitor" files, trying to access them frequently. If you have on-access scanning enabled, Sophos Endpoint Security and

Control detects each file access and sends an alert.

You should do one of the following:

■

Disable on-access scanning for adware and PUA. You can use a scheduled scan instead.

■

Authorize the application (if you want to have it running on your computers). See Authorize adware and PUAs (page 110).

Clean up the computer(s), removing applications that you have not authorized. See Clean up computers now

(page 62).

14.17 Cleanup failed

If Sophos Endpoint Security and Control fails in an attempt to clean up items ("Cleanup failed"), the reason could be:

■

It has not found all the components of a multi-component item. Run a full system scan of the

computer(s) to find the other components. See Scan computers now

(page 62).

■

Some drives or folders that contain item components are excluded from scanning. Check the

items excluded from scanning (see Exclude items from on-access scanning (page 93)). If

there are some items on the list, remove them from the list.

You have insufficient access rights.

It cannot clean up that type of item.

225

Sophos Enterprise Console

■

It has found a virus fragment, rather than an exact virus match.

The item is on a write-protected floppy disk or CD.

The item is on a write-protected NTFS volume (Windows 2000 or later).

14.18 Recover from virus side-effects

Cleanup can remove a virus from computers, but it cannot always reverse the side-effects.

Some viruses leave no side-effects. Others may make changes or corrupt data in ways that are hard to detect. To deal with this, you should:

■

On the Help menu, click View Security Information. This connects you to the Sophos website, where you can read the virus analysis.

Use backups or original copies of programs to replace infected programs. If you did not have backup copies before the infection, create them now in case of future infections.

Sometimes you can recover data from disks damaged by a virus. Sophos can supply utilities for repairing the damage caused by some viruses. Contact Sophos technical support for advice.

14.19 Recover from application side-effects

Cleanup can remove unwanted applications, but it cannot always reverse the side-effects.

Some applications modify the operating system, e.g. by changing your internet connection settings.

Sophos Endpoint Security and Control cannot always restore all settings. For example, if an application changed the browser home page, Sophos Endpoint Security and Control cannot know what the previous home page setting was.

Some applications install utilities, such as .dll or .ocx files, on your computer. If a utility is harmless

(that is, does not possess the qualities of a potentially unwanted application), e.g. a language library, and is not integral to the application, Sophos Endpoint Security and Control may not detect it as part of the application. In this case, cleanup won't remove the file from your computer.

Sometimes an application, such as adware, is part of a program that you intentionally installed, and needs to be there for the program to run. If you remove the application, the program may stop running on your computer.

You should:

■

On the Help menu, click View Security Information. This connects you to the Sophos website, where you can read the application analysis.

■

Use backups to restore your system settings or programs you want to use. If you did not have backup copies before, create them now in case of future incidents.

For more information or advice on recovering from an adware and PUA's side-effects, contact

Sophos technical support.

226

Help

14.20 Data control does not detect files uploaded via embedded browsers

Data control intercepts documents which are uploaded via standalone web browsers. It does not intercept documents uploaded via browsers embedded in third-party applications (for example,

Lotus Notes). If you have a third-party application with an embedded browser and want to monitor all uploaded documents, you must configure the application to launch an external browser.

14.21 Data control does not scan uploaded or attached files

If data control does not scan files uploaded or attached from a network location using a monitored application (for example, an email client, a web browser, or an instant messaging (IM) client), it may be because you excluded remote files from on-access scanning in the anti-virus and HIPS policy. Data control uses the same set of exclusions as the Sophos Anti-Virus on-access scanner, so if remote file scanning is disabled, it will not send any remote files for a data control check.

For information about configuring on-access scanning exclusions, see Exclude items from on-access scanning

(page 93).

Note: This restriction does not apply to storage device monitoring. Data control will intercept the transfer of files onto monitored storage devices from a network location, for example, copying files to a removable storage device or burning data onto optical media.

14.22 Uninstalled update manager is displayed in the console

After you uninstall an additional update manager, it may still be displayed in Enterprise Console,

Update managers view.

To remove the update manager from the console, select it, right-click, and then click Delete.

227

Sophos Enterprise Console

15 Glossary

Active Directory synchronization event

An event that occurs during synchronization with Active Directory.

active sub-estate

A sub-estate displayed in the Groups pane.

advanced Content

Control List editor

An editor that enables a user to create a custom Content Control List that consists of a score, maximum count, regular expression, and a trigger score that must be reached before the Content Control List is matched.

Application manager

A dialog box that enables you to allow or create new rules for applications that have been blocked by Sophos Client Firewall.

auditing

A feature that enables you to monitor changes in Enterprise Console configuration and other user and system actions.

automatic protection

Deployment of security software (installation and policy enforcement) on all the computers in an Active Directory container as soon as they are synchronized with Enterprise Console.

category

A specific tag that is used to classify SophosLabs Content Control

Lists according to their type, regulation that defines their contents, or region they apply to.

Challenge/Response

(C/R)

A full disk encryption recovery method that helps users to log on to their computers when they have forgotten their password or when they cannot access encrypted data any more. Help desk assistance is required.

Content Control List

(CCL) content rule

A set of conditions that specify file content, for example, credit or debit card numbers, or bank account details near to other forms of personally identifiable information. There are two types of Content Control List:

SophosLabs Content Control List and custom Content Control List.

A rule that contains one or more Content Control Lists and specifies the action that is taken if the user attempts to transfer data that matches all the Content Control Lists in the rule to the specified destination.

controlled application

A non-malicious application that an organization might want to detect or block because it undermines productivity or network performance.

228

Help

controlled data controlled device critical level custom Content

Control List

Dashboard

Dashboard event data control database

Default sub-estate device control estate exempt device expression file matching rule

Files that meet data control conditions.

A device that is subject to device control.

A value that triggers the change of an item’s security status to Critical.

A Content Control List that has been created by a Sophos customer.

There are two ways to create a custom Content Control List: create a simple list of search terms with a specified search condition, such as “any of these terms,” or use an advanced Content Control List editor.

An at-a-glance view of the network’s security status.

An event in which a dashboard health indicator exceeds critical level.

An email alert is generated when a dashboard event occurs.

A feature to reduce accidental data loss from workstations. It works by taking action when a workstation user tries to transfer a file that meets criteria defined in the data control policy and rules. For example, when a user attempts to copy a spreadsheet containing a list of customer data to a removable storage device or upload a document marked as confidential into a webmail account, data control will block the transfer, if configured to do so.

The component of Sophos Enterprise Console that stores details about computers on the network.

A sub-estate that has as its root the server root node of the group tree and the Unassigned group. It is displayed by default when you open

Enterprise Console for the first time.

A feature to reduce accidental data loss from workstations and restrict introduction of software from outside of the network. It works by taking action when a workstation user tries to use an unauthorized storage device or networking device on their workstation.

See IT estate.

A device that is explicitly excluded from device control.

See regular expression.

A rule that specifies the action that is taken if the user attempts to transfer a file with the specified file name or of the specified file type to the specified destination, for example, block the transfer of databases to removable storage devices.

229

Sophos Enterprise Console

full disk encryption

A feature that protects data on endpoint computers from being read or changed by unauthorized persons.

A group of managed computers defined in Sophos Enterprise Console.

group health indicator

Host Intrusion

Prevention System

(HIPS)

Generic term for icons depicting security status of a dashboard section or item, or the overall health status of the network.

A security technology that protects computers from suspicious files, unidentified viruses, and suspicious behavior.

IT estate

The company IT environment, including computers, network, and so on.

Local Self Help (LSH)

A full disk encryption recovery method that helps users to log on to their computers when they have forgotten their passwords. Users can log on by answering predefined questions. Help desk assistance is not required.

managed computer management console

The component of Sophos Enterprise Console that enables you to protect and manage computers.

management server

A computer that has Remote Management System (RMS) installed and on which Sophos Enterprise Console can report and install and update software.

maximum count

The component of Sophos Enterprise Console that handles updating and communications with networked computers.

The maximum number of matches for a regular expression that can be counted towards the total score.

out-of-date computer

A computer that has not got up-to-date Sophos software.

patch assessment

Evaluates computers for installed patches and identifies missing patches.

policy

A group of settings, for example, for updating, applied to a group or groups of computers.

potentially unwanted application (PUA)

An application that is not inherently malicious but is generally considered unsuitable for the majority of business networks.

Power-on

Authentication (POA)

A full disk encryption logon method that requires user authentication directly after the computer has been switched on, before the operating system starts. After the user has authenticated, the operating system starts and the user is logged on to Windows.

230

Help

quantity quantity key region regular expression right role role-based administration rootkit rule score

The volume of the Content Control List key data type that must be found in a file before the Content Control List is matched.

The key type of data defined in a Content Control List, to which the quantity setting is applied. For example, for a Content Control List containing credit or debit card numbers, the quantity specifies how many credit or debit card numbers must be found in a file before the

Content Control List is matched.

The scope of a SophosLabs Content Control List. The region either specifies the country the Content Control List applies to (for country-specific Content Control Lists) or shows “global” (for global

Content Control Lists that apply to all countries).

A search string that uses special characters to match a text pattern in a file. Data control uses Perl 5 regular expression syntax.

A set of permissions to perform certain tasks in Enterprise Console.

A set of rights that determines access to Enterprise Console.

A feature that allows you to specify which computers a user can access and which tasks they can carry out, depending on their role in your organization.

A Trojan or technology that is used to hide the presence of a malicious object (process, file, registry key, or network port) from the computer user or administrator.

A rule specifies the action that is taken if a file meets certain conditions.

There are two types of data control rule: file matching rule and content rule.

The number that is added to the total score for a Content Control List when a regular expression is matched.

server root node

The topmost node of the group tree in the Groups pane, which includes the Unassigned group.

Sophos Live Protection

A feature that uses in-the-cloud technology to instantly decide whether a suspicious file is a threat and take action specified in the Sophos anti-virus cleanup configuration.

Sophos Update

Manager (SUM)

Sophos-defined rule

A program that downloads Sophos security software and updates from

Sophos or another update server to shared update locations.

A rule that has been provided by Sophos as an example.

Sophos-defined rules are not updated by Sophos.

231

Sophos Enterprise Console

SophosLabs Content

Control List

A Content Control List that has been provided and is managed by

Sophos. Sophos can update SophosLabs Content Control Lists or create new Content Control Lists and make them available in

Enterprise Console. The contents of SophosLabs Content Control

Lists cannot be edited. However, the quantity can be set for each such

Content Control List.

sub-estate

A named part of the IT estate, containing a subset of the computers and groups.

sub-estate administration

A feature that restricts the computers and groups that are available to perform operations on.

software subscription

A set of versions of software for a variety of platforms, selected by the user, that Update Manager will download and keep updated. One version can be specified for each supported platform (for example,

“Latest” for Windows 2000 and later).

suspicious behavior detection suspicious file

Dynamic analysis of the behavior of all programs running on the system in order to detect and block activity which appears to be malicious.

A file that exhibits a combination of characteristics that are commonly, but not exclusively, found in viruses.

synchronization interval

The period after which a synchronization point in Enterprise Console is synchronized with the selected Active Directory container.

synchronization point

(for an Active Directory tree)

A Sophos Enterprise Console group into which the contents of a selected Active Directory container (groups and computers or groups only) will be added for synchronization, their structure preserved.

synchronization with

Active Directory

A one-way synchronization of Sophos Enterprise Console group(s) with Active Directory organizational units, or containers.

synchronized group

Any group below the synchronization point.

System Administrator

A preconfigured role that has full rights to manage Sophos security software on the network and roles in Enterprise Console.

The System Administrator role cannot be deleted or have its rights or name changed, and the Sophos Full Administrators Windows group cannot be removed from it. Other users and groups can be added to or removed from the role.

tag

A descriptor applied to a SophosLabs Content Control List to identify the contents or scope of the Content Control List. There are three types of tag: type, regulation, and region.

232

Help

tamper protection

A feature that prevents known malware and unauthorized users (local administrators and users with limited technical knowledge) from uninstalling Sophos security software or disabling it through the Sophos

Endpoint Security and Control interface.

transparent encryption

An encryption method that encrypts and decrypts data without user interaction. With full disk encryption, disks are encrypted transparently.

threshold level total score

A value that triggers the change of an item’s security status to Warning or Critical.

The sum of the scores for a Content Control List, according to the content that has been matched.

trigger score true file type type update manager

Wake on LAN (WOL)

The number of times a regular expression must be matched before a

Content Control List is matched.

The file type that is ascertained by analyzing the structure of a file as opposed to the filename extension. This is a more reliable method.

The criteria according to which SophosLabs Content Control Lists are classified, for example, a Content Control List defining passport details, postal addresses, or email addresses belongs to the Personally

Identifiable Information type.

See Sophos Update Manager.

A technology that is used on a network to remotely start a computer or wake it from sleep mode for scheduled maintenance tasks.

A value that triggers the change of an item’s security status to Warning.

warning level web control web protection

A feature that allows you to set and enforce web access policies for your organization, and to view reports on web browsing usage. You can allow or block user access to certain categories of websites, and users can also be warned whether visiting a website will violate your policies.

A feature that detects threats in web pages. This feature blocks sites that have hosted malicious content in the past and also prevents malicious downloads. Web protection is part of the anti-virus and HIPS policy.

233

Sophos Enterprise Console

16 Technical support

You can find technical support for Sophos products in any of these ways:

■

Visit the SophosTalk community at community.sophos.com/ and search for other users who are experiencing the same problem.

■

Visit the Sophos support knowledgebase at www.sophos.com/en-us/support.aspx

Download the product documentation at www.sophos.com/en-us/support/documentation.aspx

Open a ticket with our support team at https://secure2.sophos.com/support/contact-support/support-query.aspx

234

Help

17 Legal notices

2000–2014 Sophos Limited. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise unless you are either a valid licensee where the documentation can be reproduced in accordance with the license terms or you otherwise have the prior permission in writing of the copyright owner.

Sophos, Sophos Anti-Virus and SafeGuard are registered trademarks of Sophos Limited, Sophos

Group and Utimaco Safeware AG, as applicable. All other product and company names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

ACE

™

, TAO

™

, CIAO

™

, DAnCE

™

, and CoSMIC

™

ACE

™

, TAO

™

, CIAO

™

, DAnCE

™

, and CoSMIC

™

(henceforth referred to as "DOC software") are copyrighted by Douglas C. Schmidt and his research group at Washington University , University of California, Irvine , and Vanderbilt University , Copyright (c) 1993-2014, all rights reserved. Since

DOC software is open-source, freely available software, you are free to use, modify, copy, and distribute—perpetually and irrevocably—the DOC software source code and object code produced from the source, as well as copy and distribute modified versions of this software. You must, however, include this copyright statement along with any code built using DOC software that you release. No copyright statement needs to be provided if you just ship binary executables of your software products.

You can use DOC software in commercial and/or binary software releases and are under no obligation to redistribute any of your source code that is built using DOC software. Note, however, that you may not misappropriate the DOC software code, such as copyrighting it yourself or claiming authorship of the DOC software code, in a way that will prevent DOC software from being distributed freely using an open-source development model. You needn't inform anyone that you're using DOC software in your software, though we encourage you to let us know so we can promote your project in the DOC software success stories .

The ACE , TAO , CIAO , DAnCE , and CoSMIC web sites are maintained by the DOC Group at the

Institute for Software Integrated Systems (ISIS) and the Center for Distributed Object Computing of Washington University, St. Louis for the development of open-source software as part of the open-source software community. Submissions are provided by the submitter "as is" with no warranties whatsoever, including any warranty of merchantability, noninfringement of third party intellectual property, or fitness for any particular purpose. In no event shall the submitter be liable for any direct, indirect, special, exemplary, punitive, or consequential damages, including without limitation, lost profits, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. Likewise, DOC software is provided as is with no warranties of any kind, including the warranties of design, merchantability, and fitness for a particular purpose, noninfringement, or arising from a course of dealing, usage or trade practice. Washington University, UC Irvine, Vanderbilt University, their employees, and students shall have no liability with respect to the infringement of copyrights, trade secrets or any patents by DOC software or any part thereof. Moreover, in no event will Washington University,

UC Irvine, or Vanderbilt University, their employees, or students be liable for any lost revenue or profits or other special, indirect and consequential damages.

235

Sophos Enterprise Console

DOC software is provided with no support and without any obligation on the part of Washington

University, UC Irvine, Vanderbilt University, their employees, or students to assist in its use, correction, modification, or enhancement. A number of companies around the world provide commercial support for DOC software, however. DOC software is Y2K-compliant, as long as the underlying OS platform is Y2K-compliant. Likewise, DOC software is compliant with the new US daylight savings rule passed by Congress as "The Energy Policy Act of 2005," which established new daylight savings times (DST) rules for the United States that expand DST as of March 2007.

Since DOC software obtains time/date and calendaring information from operating systems users will not be affected by the new DST rules as long as they upgrade their operating systems accordingly.

The names ACE

™

, TAO

™

, CIAO

™

, DAnCE

™

, CoSMIC

™

, Washington University, UC Irvine, and

Vanderbilt University, may not be used to endorse or promote products or services derived from this source without express written permission from Washington University, UC Irvine, or Vanderbilt

University. This license grants no permission to call products or services derived from this source

ACE

™

, TAO

™

, CIAO

™

, DAnCE

™

, or CoSMIC

™

, nor does it grant permission for the name

Washington University, UC Irvine, or Vanderbilt University to appear in their names.

If you have any suggestions, additions, comments, or questions, please let me know.

Douglas C. Schmidt

Apache

The Sophos software that is described in this document may include some software programs that are licensed (or sublicensed) to the user under the Apache License. A copy of the license agreement for any such included software can be found at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

Boost

Version 1.0, 17 August 2003

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license (the “Software”) to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following:

The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a source language processor.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR

OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR

THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

236

Help

Common Public License

The Sophos software that is referenced in this document includes or may include some software programs that are licensed (or sublicensed) to the user under the Common Public License (CPL), which, among other rights, permits the user to have access to the source code. The CPL requires for any software licensed under the terms of the CPL, which is distributed in object code form, that the source code for such software also be made available to the users of the object code form. For any such software covered under the CPL, the source code is available via mail order by submitting a request to Sophos; via email to [email protected]

or via the web at http://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/contact-support/contact-information.aspx

. A copy of the license agreement for any such included software can be found at http://opensource.org/licenses/cpl1.0.php

ConvertUTF

This source code is provided as is by Unicode, Inc. No claims are made as to fitness for any particular purpose. No warranties of any kind are expressed or implied. The recipient agrees to determine applicability of information provided. If this file has been purchased on magnetic or optical media from Unicode, Inc., the sole remedy for any claim will be exchange of defective media within 90 days of receipt.

Unicode, Inc. hereby grants the right to freely use the information supplied in this file in the creation of products supporting the Unicode Standard, and to make copies of this file in any form for internal or external distribution as long as this notice remains attached.

Loki

The MIT License (MIT)

2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL

THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR

OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,

ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR

OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

237

Sophos Enterprise Console

OpenSSL Cryptography and SSL/TLS Toolkit

The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to

OpenSSL please contact [email protected].

OpenSSL license

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:

“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL

Toolkit. ( http://www.openssl.org/ )”

4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected]

5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:

“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL

Toolkit ( http://www.openssl.org/ )”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED

OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES

OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.

IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS

OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY

OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ( [email protected]

). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ( [email protected]

Original SSLeay license

1995–1998 Eric Young ( [email protected]

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ( [email protected]

). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscape’s SSL.

238

Help

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4,

RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson

( [email protected]

Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:

“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ( [email protected]

)”

The word “cryptographic” can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory

(application code) you must include an acknowledgement:

“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ( [email protected]

)”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN

NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,

OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE

USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The license and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license [including the GNU Public License.]

WilsonORMapper

2007, Paul Wilson

239

Sophos Enterprise Console

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

■

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

■

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS

IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR

PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

240

Index

access to Enterprise Console

accessing disks

acknowledge alerts

acknowledge errors

Active Directory

40 ,

193

importing from

synchronization alerts

193

synchronizing with

Active Directory synchronization

adding applications

117

122

adding computers

adding computers to groups

adding rights

adware

scanning for

adware and PUAs

110

authorizing

110

adware and PUAs, pre-authorizing

111

alert icons

alerts

acknowledge

Active Directory synchronization

193

clear

dealing with

187

information about detected items

network status

192

resolving

subscriptions

186

update manager

all files, scanning

allow

181

allow file and printer sharing

118

allowing

118

125–126

file and printer sharing

hidden processes

LAN traffic

rawsockets

alternative update source

anti-virus

anti-virus and HIPS policy

application control

events

messaging

application control policy

applications

adding

blocking

trusting

applying policies

archive files, scanning

Help assigning policies

auditing

disabling

enabling

authorize

suspicious items

website

authorized adware, blocking

112

authorized PUAs, blocking

112

authorizing

110

adware and PUAs

110

automatic cleanup

automatic disinfection

automatic protection

during synchronization with Active Directory

automatic updating

bandwidth

limiting

basic

basic web control

behavior monitoring

enabling

block

controlled applications

blocking

applications

authorized adware

authorized PUAs

file and printer sharing

119

bootstrap locations

buffer overflows

104

detecting

104

central reporting, configuring

Challenge/Response

key recovery file

recover password

checksums

cleanup

automatic

failed

manual

cleanup status

company certificate

computer details

copying

printing

241

Sophos Enterprise Console computer list

219

copying data from

219

printing data from

219

computers with problems

configurations, applying

configuring

central reporting

computer list filter

Dashboard

on-access scanning

policies

update manager

connectivity problems

224

Content Control Lists

155–156

creating

155

creating using the advanced editor

156

editing

155

editing using the advanced editor

156

content data control rules

152

creating

152

controlled applications

143

block

143

scan for

143

controlled applications, uninstall

copying

computer details

computer list data

creating groups

creating policies

creating reports

205

creating roles

creating scheduled scans

creating sub-estates

Dashboard

10–11 ,

configuring

panels

security status icons

data control

actions

adding rules to a policy

153

CCL

148

Content Control List advanced editor

156

Content Control Lists

148

content rules

152

creating Content Control Lists

155

editing Content Control Lists

155

enabling

149

enabling data control

events

excluding files

exporting Content Control Lists

159

exporting rules

155

file matching rules

150

importing Content Control Lists

159

data control (continued) importing rules

155

messaging

190

overview

144

removing rules from a policy

rule conditions

rules

turning on or off

data control rules

adding to a policy

dealing with alerts

deleting a group

deleting policies

deleting roles

desktop messaging

189

detecting buffer overflows

104

detecting malicious behavior

103

detecting suspicious behavior

device control

blocking devices

blocking network bridging

160

controlled devices

160

detecting and blocking devices

163

detecting devices without blocking

162

events

160 ,

196

exempting a device from a policy

164

exempting a device from all policies

163

list of exempt devices

165

messaging

191

overview

159

selecting device types

161

disconnected computers

discovering computers

40–42

by IP range

importing from Active Directory

importing from file

on the network

with Active Directory

disinfection

62–63 ,

automatic

, 97

manual

download scanning

disabling

enabling

dual location

editing policies

editing roles

email alerts

187

192–193

Active Directory synchronization

193

anti-virus and HIPS

187

network status

192

enabling location roaming

enabling web protection

106

242

encryption

Challenge/Response

credentials

events

197

install

key recovery file

218

Local Self Help

218

overview

166

Power-on Authentication

168

Protect Computers Wizard

recovery

settings

Endpoints view

copying data from

printing data from

Enterprise Console

copying data from

printing data from

Enterprise Console access

Enterprise Console interface

12 ,

Endpoints view

Update managers view

errors

acknowledge

clear

event logging

events

application control

data control

device control

encryption

exporting to a file

firewall

patch assessment

tamper protection

web

exclusions

importing or exporting

101

on-access scanning

scheduled scanning

exporting reports

extensions

failed cleanup

feedback to Sophos

file and printer sharing

118

allowing

118

file and printer sharing, allowing

118

file and printer sharing, blocking

119

file matching data control rules

150

creating

150

file sharing, allowing

118

file sharing, blocking

119

file types scanned

107

filtering computer list

by detected item

filtering ICMP messages

128

finding computers

in Enterprise Console

firewall

adding applications

adding checksums

advanced configuration

121

advanced options

121

allow file and printer sharing

creating a rule

disabling

enabling

events

setting up

trusting applications

117 ,

122–124

firewall configuration

141

exporting

141

importing

141

fixed versions, updating

full disk encryption

Challenge/Response

company certificate

configure encryption mode

167

configure logon mode

168

configure Wake on LAN

events

key recovery file

Local Self Help

overview

recovery

settings

full system scan

getting started

global rules

setting

glossary

granting rights

groups

31–33 ,

adding computers

creating

cutting and pasting

deleting

importing from Active Directory

policies used

removing computers

renaming

synchronizing with Active Directory

Unassigned

hidden processes, allowing

125

Help

243

Sophos Enterprise Console

HIPS

HIPS alerts

HIPS messaging

desktop

SNMP

Host Intrusion Prevention System

ICMP messages

filtering

information about

icons

immediate scan

immediate updating

importing computers

from file

in-the-cloud technology

104

infected boot sector

initial installation source

installation failure

223

Sophos Endpoint Security and Control

223

intelligent updating

77–79

enabling

interactive mode, about

121

interactive mode, enabling

121

interface

7 ,

Endpoints view

Update managers view

LAN traffic, allowing

Local Self Help

recover password

location awareness

about

setting up

using two network adapters

137

location roaming

77–79

enabling

Mac viruses, scanning for

malicious behavior

103

detecting

103

managed computers

manual cleanup

manual disinfection

manual updating

messaging

application control

desktop

SNMP

monitor mode

244

network shares

supported

network status alerts

192

new user

non-interactive mode, changing to a

122

on-access scanning

90–94

best practices

cleanup

configuring

disable

enable

encryption software

excluding items from

importing or exporting exclusions

on read

on rename

on write

specifying file extensions

turn off

turn on

out-of-date computers

84 ,

223

finding

updating

partially detected item

patch assessment

default settings

disabling

enabling

event views

events

interval

overview

patch details

turning off

turning on

policies

anti-virus and HIPS

applying

assigning

checking

configuring

creating

default

deleting

editing

enforcing

full disk encryption

166

overview

renaming

policies (continued) which groups use

policy

182

potentially suspicious items, pre-authorizing

113

Power-on Authentication

recovering

pre-authorize

website

pre-authorizing adware and PUAs

111

pre-authorizing potentially suspicious items

113

preconfigured roles

primary locations, defining

138

primary server

77 ,

changing credentials

printer sharing, allowing

118

printer sharing, blocking

printing

computer details

computer list data

printing reports

Protect Computers Wizard

52–53

credentials

52–53

install encryption features

selecting features

protected computers

55–56

protected network

protecting computers

credentials

pre-requisites, anti-virus

pre-requisites, encryption

preparing for installation

Protect Computers Wizard

selecting features

protection, check

PUA

frequent alerts

not detected

side-effects

PUAs

scanning for

publishing software on a web server

Internet Information Services (IIS), using

rawsockets, allowing

126

recovery

217–218

key recovery file

218

removal tool

third-party security software

removing computers from groups

renaming groups

renaming policies

reports

205–214

alert and event history

206

alert summary

207

alerts and events by item name

207

reports (continued) alerts and events by time

208

alerts and events per location

209

creating

205

displaying as table

213

endpoint policy non-compliance

210

endpoint protection by time

events by user

exporting

layout

managed endpoint protection

211

overview

205

policy non-compliance by time

printing

running

scheduling

updating hierarchy

resolving alerts

actions to take

cleanup status

information about detected items

rights

adding

granting

roles

20–22

creating

deleting

editing

granting rights to

modifying

preconfigured

renaming

rule

set

rule priority

running reports

runtime behavior analysis

102

scan now

scanning

108

exclusions

108

scanning all files

scanning archive files

scanning computers

immediately

scanning for adware and PUAs

scanning for Mac viruses

scanning for suspicious files

scanning system memory

scans

scheduled

scheduled scanning

99–101

cleanup

excluding items from

100

importing or exporting exclusions

101

Help

245

Sophos Enterprise Console scheduled scanning (continued) specifying file extensions

scheduled scans

95–96

creating

scanning settings

scheduling reports

212

scheduling updates

secondary configurations, creating

138

secondary server

selecting software

selecting subscriptions

setting a rule

setting global rules

setup

site categories

SNMP messaging

software

selecting

subscribing to

software distribution

Sophos Endpoint Security and Control installation failure

223

Sophos Enterprise Console

Sophos Live Protection

104–105

disabling

105

enabling

105

in-the-cloud technology

overview

turning off

turning on

Sophos Mobile Control

Sophos Update Manager

sorting computer list

computers with problems

unprotected computers

specifying on-access scanning file extensions

specifying scheduled scanning file extensions

spyware

sub-estates

20 ,

23–24

active

changing

copying

creating

deleting

editing

modifying

renaming

selecting

subscribing to software

subscription alerts

186

subscription usage

subscriptions

74 ,

adding

selecting

supported network shares

suspicious behavior

103

detecting

103

suspicious files

scanning for

suspicious items

112

allow

112

authorize

112

suspicious items, deleting from authorized list

113

synchronization point

synchronization with Active Directory

43 ,

47–48

automatic protection

disable

enable

properties, edit

synchronized group

system memory scanning

tamper protection

changing password

disabling

enabling

events

overview

turning off

turning on

third-party security software removal tool

timeout

224

toolbar buttons

Trojans

troubleshooting

221–227

cleanup

225

connectivity problems

224

data control

227

data control, embedded browsers

227

firewall disabled

221

firewall not installed

Linux

Mac

on-access scanning

out-of-date computers

223

outstanding alerts

222

partially detected item

PUA, frequent alerts

PUA, not detected

PUA, side-effects

Sophos Endpoint Security and Control installation failure

223

timeout

224

Unassigned group

223

uninstalling Update Manager

UNIX

unmanaged computers

virus, side-effects

Windows 2000 or later

224

trusting applications

two network adapters

using

246

types of updating

Unassigned folder

Unassigned group

223

uninstall controlled applications

144

unmanaged computers

222

unprotected computers

up-to-date computers

checking

update manager

64–70 ,

83–84

adding

additional

alerts

83–84

clearing

complying with configuration

configuring

errors

logging

monitoring

scheduling

selecting update source

self-updating

software distribution

status

supported network shares

updating

viewing configuration

Update managers view

update schedule

update server

update source

65 ,

77 ,

alternative

primary

secondary

77 ,

web server

updating

71–72

74 ,

76–82 ,

automatic

fixed versions

immediate

initial installation source

intelligent updating

77–78

intelligent updating, enabling

legacy

limiting bandwidth

location roaming

77–78

location roaming, enabling

logging

updating (continued) manual

out-of-date computers

primary server

primary update source

proxy details

publishing software on a web server

scheduling

secondary server

77 ,

secondary update source

77 ,

software packages

types

user roles

viewing

user sub-estates

viewing

virus

side-effects

virus alerts

virus messaging

desktop

SNMP

viruses

Wake on LAN

169–170

warn

181

warning signs

web

events

web appliance

web control

web control policy

web protection

disabling

enabling

overview

website

allow

authorize

pre-authorize

website exceptions

working mode, changing to interactive

121

worms

Help

247

Sophos Enterprise Console

Help

Contents

1 About Enterprise Console

2 Guide to the Enterprise Console interface

2.1 User interface layout

Toolbar

Dashboard

Computer list

2.2 Toolbar buttons

2.3 Dashboard panels

2.4 Security status icons

Dashboard panel health icons

The network health icon

2.5 Navigating the Endpoints view

Computer list

Groups pane

Policies pane

2.6 Computer list icons

Alerts

Protection disabled or out of date

Computer status

2.7 Filter computers by the name of a detected item

2.8 Find a computer in Enterprise Console

2.9 Navigating the Update managers view

Computer list

Software subscriptions

3 Getting started with Sophos Enterprise

Console

4 Setting up Enterprise Console

4.1 Managing roles and sub-estates

4.1.1 About roles and sub-estates

4.1.2 What are the preconfigured roles?

4.1.3 Create a role

4.1.4 Delete a role

4.1.5 Edit a role

4.1.6 Grant rights to a role

4.1.7 Create a sub-estate

4.1.8 Change active sub-estate

4.1.9 Edit a sub-estate

4.1.10 Copy a sub-estate

4.1.11 Delete a sub-estate

4.1.12 View user or group roles and sub-estates

4.1.13 What tasks do the rights authorize?

4.1.14 How can another user use Enterprise Console?

4.2 Creating and using groups

4.2.1 What are groups for?

4.2.2 What is a group?

4.2.3 What is the Unassigned group?

4.2.4 Create a group

4.2.5 Add computers to a group

4.2.6 Delete computers from a group

4.2.7 Cut and paste a group

4.2.8 Delete a group

4.2.9 Rename a group

4.2.10 Check which policies a group uses

4.3 Creating and using policies

4.3.1 About policies

4.3.2 What is a policy?

4.3.3 What are the default policies?

Updating policy

Anti-virus and HIPS policy

Application control policy

Firewall policy

Data control policy

Device control policy

Patch policy

Tamper protection policy

Web control policy

Full disk encryption policy

4.3.4 Do I need to create my own policies?

Updating policy

Anti-virus and HIPS

Application control

Firewall policy

Data control

Device control

Patch

Tamper protection

Web control